0% found this document useful (0 votes)
250 views192 pages

Ic-R9500 Eng 03 PDF

Uploaded by

Agus Winarko
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
0% found this document useful (0 votes)
250 views192 pages

Ic-R9500 Eng 03 PDF

Uploaded by

Agus Winarko
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
You are on page 1/ 192

COMMUNICATIONS RECEIVER

iR9500
Instruction Manual

A-6553H-1EX-e
Printed in Japan
© 2007–2011 Icom Inc.
FOREWORD
Thank you for making the IC-R9500 your radio of choice. We hope you
agree with Icom’s philosophy of “technology first.” Many hours of research
and development went into the design of your IC-R9500.

D FEATURES
❍ Ultimate receiver performance: 109 dB wide dynamic
range and third-order intercept (IP3) of +40 dBm (HF
bands only)
❍ 7-inch wide color TFT LCD
❍ Built-in Baudot FSK demodulator
❍ High resolution spectrum scope— center frequency and fix
frequency modes, plus mini-scope displays

IMPORTANT
READ THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL CAREFULLY before at-
tempting to operate the receiver.

SAVE THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL. This manual contains im-


portant safety and operating instructions for the IC-R9500.

EXPLICIT DEFINITIONS
WORD DEFINITION
Personal injury, fire hazard or electric shock may
R WARNING!
occur.
CAUTION Equipment damage may occur.
If disregarded, inconvenience only. No risk of personal
NOTE
injury, fire or electric shock.

TRADEMARKS
Icom, Icom Inc. and the Icom logo are registered trademarks of Icom
Incorporated (Japan) in Japan, the United States, the United Kingdom,
Germany, France, Spain, Russia and/or other countries.

ABOUT RE-EXPORTING THIS PRODUCT:


If re-exporting this product, it is your responsibility to check you are in compliance with the export regulations
of your country or the country you are exporting to. Export regulations can be highly restrictive in relation to
some of the technology implemented in this product. Your failure to comply with export regulations may subject
you to fines or penalties. Please consult with the relevant Government Department in your country.

i
FCC INFORMATION ABOUT APCO PROJECT 25
• FOR CLASS B UNINTENTIONAL RADIATORS This device made under license under one or more
This equipment has been tested and found to comply of the following US patents: #4,590,473, #4,636,791,
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to #5,148,482, #5,185,796, #5,271,017, #5,377,229.
part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer- The IMBE™ voice coding technology embodied in
ence in a residential installation. This equipment gen- this product is protected by intellectual property rights
erates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy including patent rights, copyrights and trade secrets
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. This voice coding
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio Technology is licensed solely for use within this com-
communications. However, there is no guarantee that munications equipment. The user of this technology
interference will not occur in a particular installation. If is explicitly prohibited from attempting to decompile,
this equipment does cause harmful interference to reverse engineer, or disassemble the object code, or
radio or television reception, which can be determined in any other way convert the object code into a
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is human-readable form. U.S. Pat. nos. #5,870,405,
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or #5,826,222, #5,754,974, #5,701,390, #5,715,365,
more of the following measures: #5,649,050, #5,630,011, #5,581,656, #5,517,511,
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. #5,491,772, #5,247,579, #5,226,084, #5,195,166.
• Increase the separation between the equipment
and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit
different from that to which the receiver is con-
nected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV
technician for help. P25 digital mode is available when the optional
UT-122 digital unit is installed.

An LCD filter has been added to European versions for Electromagnetic interference (EMI) and Radio
Frequency interference (RFI) compliance purpose. In some instances, the LCD may be a little difficult to see,
but this is normal and does not indicate an LCD malfunction.

ii
PRECAUTIONS
R WARNING! NEVER operate the receiver with DO NOT use harsh solvents such as benzine or alco-
a headset or other audio accessories at high volume hol when cleaning, as they can damage the receiver’s
levels. Hearing experts advise against continuous high surfaces.
volume operation. If you experience a ringing in your
ears, reduce the volume or discontinue use. DO NOT use or place the receiver in areas with
temperatures below 0°C (+32°F) or above +50°C
R WARNING! NEVER operate or touch the re- (+122°F).
ceiver with wet hands. This may result in an electric
shock or damage to the receiver. DO NOT place the receiver in excessively dusty en-
vironments or in direct sunlight.
R WARNING! NEVER let metal, wire or other ob-
jects protrude into the receiver or into connectors on DO NOT place the receiver against walls or putting
the rear panel. This may result in an electric shock. anything on top of the receiver. This may overheat the
receiver.
R WARNING! Immediately turn the receiver power
OFF and remove the power cable if it emits an abnor- Always place unit in a secure place to avoid inadvert-
mal odor, sound or smoke. Contact your Icom dealer ent use by children.
or distributor for advice. The LCD display may have cosmetic imperfections
CAUTION: NEVER put the transceiver in any un- that appear as small dark or light spots. This is not a
stable place (such as on a slanted surface or vibrated malfunction or defect, but a normal characteristic of
place). This may cause injury and/or damage to the LCD displays.
transceiver.
During maritime mobile operation, keep the receiver
CAUTION: NEVER change the internal settings as far away as possible from the magnetic navigation
of the receiver. This may reduce receiver performance compass to prevent erroneous indications.
and/or damage to the receiver. Turn [I/O] switch (on the rear panel) OFF and/or dis-
The receiver warranty does not cover any problems connect the AC power cable from the AC outlet when
caused by unauthorized internal adjustment. you will not use the receiver for a long period of time.

CAUTION: NEVER block any cooling vents on the For U.S.A. only
top, rear or bottom of the receiver. CAUTION: Changes or modifications to this device,
not expressly approved by Icom Inc., could void your
CAUTION: NEVER expose the receiver to rain, authority to operate this device under FCC regula-
snow or any liquids. tions.

CAUTION: NEVER install the receiver in a place


without adequate ventilation. Heat dissipation may be
reduced, and the receiver may be damaged.

CAUTION: The line-voltage receptacle must be near


the receiver and must be easily accessible. Avoid ex-
tension cords.

CAUTION: The receiver weighs approx. 20 kg


(44 lb). Always have two people available to carry, lift
or turn over the receiver.

iii
SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES

q w e r

(FH M4×16 mm)

t y u i o

!0 !2
(FH M4×12 mm)

!1 FH: Flat head


PH: Pan head (see p. 2-7 for installation details)
(PH M4×8 mm)

q AC power cable* ������������������������������������������������� 1


w Carrying handles ������������������������������������������� 1 set
e Spare fuse (FGB 1 A) ����������������������������������������� 1
r Spare fuse
FGB 4 A (100 V/120 V versions)........................... 1
0234002MXP (230 V/240 V versions) ������������������� 1
t RCA plugs ����������������������������������������������������������� 4
y DC power plug ���������������������������������������������������� 1
u 2-conductor 1⁄8″ plugs ����������������������������������������� 7
i 3-conductor 1⁄8″ plugs ����������������������������������������� 1
o 8 pin ACC plugs �������������������������������������������������� 2
!0 Screws for side plate† ������������������������������������������ 4
!1 Hiding screws for screw hole† ����������������������������� 2
!2 Ferrite bead‡ ������������������������������������������������������� 3

*May differ from that shown according to version.


†These screw are used when removing rack mounting han-

dles.
‡T hese are used when connecting cables to [DATA IN],

[LAN] or [USB].

iv
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section 1 PANEL DESCRIPTION
■ Front panel ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 1-2
■ Rear panel �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 1-10
■ LCD display ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 1-12
■ Screen menu arrangement ������������������������������������������������������������� 1-14

Section 2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS


■ Unpacking ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-2
■ Selecting a location �������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-2
■ Grounding ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-2
■ Antenna connection �������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-3
■ TV jumper cable connection (except for USA versions) ������������������� 2-4
■ Carrying handle attachment ������������������������������������������������������������� 2-4
■ Rack mounting handle detachment �������������������������������������������������� 2-4
■ Required connections ����������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-5
D Rear panel ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 2-5
■ Advanced connections ��������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-6
D Front panel ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-6
D Rear panel—1 ������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 2-6
D Rear panel—2 ������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 2-7
■ Tape recorder connections ��������������������������������������������������������������� 2-8
D Recording from the front panel or rear panel ������������������������������� 2-8
D Separately recording audio and frequency ���������������������������������� 2-9
■ Monitor display connection ������������������������������������������������������������� 2-10
■ Transceive function ������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-10
■ FSK and AFSK (SSTV) connections ���������������������������������������������� 2-11
■ Accessory connector information ��������������������������������������������������� 2-12

Section 3 BASIC OPERATIONS


■ When first applying power (CPU resetting) �������������������������������������� 3-2
■ Initial settings ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 3-2
■ Selecting VFO mode ������������������������������������������������������������������������ 3-3
■ Selecting memory mode ������������������������������������������������������������������� 3-3
■ Frequency setting ����������������������������������������������������������������������������� 3-4
D Direct frequency entry with the keypad ���������������������������������������� 3-4
D Tuning with the main dial �������������������������������������������������������������� 3-5
D Selecting a tuning step ����������������������������������������������������������������� 3-5
D Auto tuning step function �������������������������������������������������������������� 3-6
D 1⁄4 tuning step function ����������������������������������������������������������������� 3-6
■ Operating mode selection ���������������������������������������������������������������� 3-7
■ Volume setting ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 3-8
■ RF gain adjustment �������������������������������������������������������������������������� 3-8
■ Squelch level adjustment ������������������������������������������������������������������ 3-8
■ Audio tone adjustment ���������������������������������������������������������������������� 3-9
D Treble level adjustment ����������������������������������������������������������������� 3-9
D Bass level adjustment ������������������������������������������������������������������� 3-9
■ Meter indication selection ��������������������������������������������������������������� 3-10
D Meter type selection ������������������������������������������������������������������� 3-10

Section 4 RECEIVE MODES


■ Operating FM ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 4-2
D Convenient functions for FM ����������������������������������������������������������4-2
■ Duplex operation ������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 4-3
D Offset frequency setting ����������������������������������������������������������������4-3
v
TABLE OF CONTENTS
■ Tone/DTCS squelch operation ��������������������������������������������������������� 4-4
■ Operating WFM �������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 4-5
D Convenient functions for WFM ������������������������������������������������������4-5
■ Operating AM ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 4-6
D Convenient functions for AM ���������������������������������������������������������4-6
■ Operating SSB ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 4-7
D Convenient functions for SSB ��������������������������������������������������������4-7
■ Operating CW ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 4-8
D Convenient functions for CW ���������������������������������������������������������4-8
D APF (Audio Peak Filter) operation �������������������������������������������������4-9
D About CW reverse mode ���������������������������������������������������������������4-9
D About CW pitch control ������������������������������������������������������������������4-9
■ Operating FSK �������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 4-10
D Convenient functions for FSK ������������������������������������������������������4-11
D About FSK reverse mode ������������������������������������������������������������4-11
D Twin peak filter �����������������������������������������������������������������������������4-11
D Setting FSK tone frequency ��������������������������������������������������������4-12
D Functions for the FSK decoder indication �����������������������������������4-13
D Setting the decoder threshold level ���������������������������������������������4-13
D FSK decode set mode �����������������������������������������������������������������4-14
D Setting FSK Baud rate �����������������������������������������������������������������4-16
D Time stamp function ��������������������������������������������������������������������4-16
D Data saving ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������4-17
■ Operating P25 (Requires optional UT-122)������������������������������������� 4-18
D Convenient functions for P25 ������������������������������������������������������4-18
■ Digital squelch operation����������������������������������������������������������������� 4-19
■ TV channel operation (except for USA versions)���������������������������� 4-20
D Convenient functions for TV operation ����������������������������������������4-20

Section 5 RECEIVE FUNCTIONS


■ Spectrum scope screen �������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-2
D Center mode ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-2
D Fix mode ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-3
D Peak marker function �������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-4
D Wide band-pass filter selection������������������������������������������������������ 5-5
D Wide band scope function������������������������������������������������������������� 5-5
D Mini scope screen indication �������������������������������������������������������� 5-6
D Scope set mode ��������������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-6
■ Preamplifier �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-9
■ Attenuator ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-9
■ AGC function ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-10
D Selecting the preset value �����������������������������������������������������������5-10
D Adjusting the AGC time constant ������������������������������������������������5-10
D Setting the AGC time constant preset value �������������������������������5-10
■ Twin PBT operation ������������������������������������������������������������������������ 5-11
■ IF filter selection ����������������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-12
D IF filter selection ������������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-12
D Filter passband width setting ������������������������������������������������������ 5-12
D Roofing filter selection ���������������������������������������������������������������� 5-13
D DSP filter shape ������������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-13
D Filter shape set mode ����������������������������������������������������������������� 5-13
■ Noise blanker ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-15
D NB set mode ������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-15
vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
■ Noise reduction ������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-16
■ Notch function ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-16
■ Autotune function ���������������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-17
■ AFC function ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-17

Section 6 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS


■ About digital voice recorder �������������������������������������������������������������� 6-2
■ Recording a received audio��������������������������������������������������������������� 6-3
D Regular recording ������������������������������������������������������������������������� 6-3
■ Playing the recorded audio ��������������������������������������������������������������� 6-4
D Regular playing ����������������������������������������������������������������������������� 6-4
■ Erasing the recorded contents ��������������������������������������������������������� 6-4
■ Selecting the CF memory card or USB-Memory ����������������������������� 6-4
■ Short recording ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 6-5
D Recording ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 6-5
D Playing back ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 6-5
■ Voice set mode ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 6-6

Section 7 MEMORY OPERATION


■ Memory channels ����������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7-2
■ Memory channel selection ���������������������������������������������������������������� 7-3
D Using the [M-CH]/[BANK] selectors ���������������������������������������������� 7-3
D Using the keypad �������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7-3
■ Memory channel programming ��������������������������������������������������������� 7-4
D Programming in VFO mode ���������������������������������������������������������� 7-4
D Programming in memory mode ���������������������������������������������������� 7-4
■ Frequency transferring ���������������������������������������������������������������������� 7-5
D Transferring in VFO mode ������������������������������������������������������������� 7-5
D Transferring in memory mode ������������������������������������������������������� 7-5
■ Memory names ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7-6
D Editing (programming) memory names ���������������������������������������� 7-6
■ Memory clearing ������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7-6
■ Memory list screen ��������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7-7
D Selecting a memory channel using the memory list screen �������� 7-7
D Confirming programmed memory channels ��������������������������������� 7-7
D Memory bank set �������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7-8
D Editing memory channel ��������������������������������������������������������������� 7-9

Section 8 SCANS
■ Scan types ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 8-2
■ Preparation ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 8-3
■ Voice squelch control function ���������������������������������������������������������� 8-3
■ Scan set mode ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 8-4
■ Priority scan��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 8-5
D Setting ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 8-5
D Priority scan operation ������������������������������������������������������������������ 8-5
■ Programmed scan ���������������������������������������������������������������������������� 8-6
D Setting ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 8-6
D Program scan operation ��������������������������������������������������������������� 8-7
■ ∂F scan �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 8-8
D Setting ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 8-8
D ∂F scan operation ������������������������������������������������������������������������ 8-8
■ Fine programmed scan/fine ∂F scan operation�������������������������������� 8-9
■ Auto memory write scan operation�������������������������������������������������� 8-10
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
■ Memory scan ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 8-11
D Setting ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 8-11
D Memory scan operation �������������������������������������������������������������� 8-11
D Programming the select memory scan setting ��������������������������� 8-12
D Select memory scan operation ��������������������������������������������������� 8-13
D Mode select memory scan operation ����������������������������������������� 8-14
■ Skip scan ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 8-15
D Specifying skip channels ������������������������������������������������������������ 8-15
D Programming skip frequencies (for programming scan) ������������ 8-15
D Skip scan setting ������������������������������������������������������������������������ 8-15
■ Tone scan ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 8-16
■ Scan resume condition�������������������������������������������������������������������� 8-17
■ Scan speed�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 8-18
■ Scan delay��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 8-18

Section 9 OTHER FUNCTIONS


■ Voice synthesizer operation �������������������������������������������������������������� 9-2
■ Lock function ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 9-2
D Dial lock function��������������������������������������������������������������������������� 9-2
D Panel lock function������������������������������������������������������������������������� 9-2
■ Dial click function ������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 9-3
■ Antenna selection ����������������������������������������������������������������������������� 9-3

Section 10 CLOCK AND TIMERS


■ Time set mode �������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 10-2
■ Daily timer setting ��������������������������������������������������������������������������� 10-3
■ Setting sleep timer �������������������������������������������������������������������������� 10-4
■ Timer operation ������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 10-4

Section 11 SET MODE


■ Set mode description ���������������������������������������������������������������������� 11-2
D Set mode operation �������������������������������������������������������������������� 11-2
D Screen arrangement ������������������������������������������������������������������� 11-3
■ Level set mode ������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 11-4
■ ACC set mode �������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 11-7
■ Display set mode ���������������������������������������������������������������������������� 11-8
■ Others set mode ��������������������������������������������������������������������������� 11-10
■ CF card/USB-Memory set menu �������������������������������������������������� 11-16
D CF/USB-Memory set screen arrangement ������������������������������� 11-16
D Load option set mode ��������������������������������������������������������������� 11-17
■ File saving ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 11-18
■ File loading ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 11-19
■ Changing the file name ���������������������������������������������������������������� 11-20
■ File copying ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 11-21
■ Deleting a file �������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 11-22
■ Unmount an USB-Memory ����������������������������������������������������������� 11-22
■ Formatting the CF card or USB-Memory�������������������������������������� 11-23
■ Display set (Video) mode ������������������������������������������������������������� 11-24
■ LCD set mode ������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 11-26

Section 12 MAINTENANCE
■ Troubleshooting ������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 12-2
D Receiver power ��������������������������������������������������������������������������� 12-2
D Receiving ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 12-2
viii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
D Scanning ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 12-3
D Display ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 12-3
D Voice recorder ����������������������������������������������������������������������������� 12-3
D Format memory media ��������������������������������������������������������������� 12-3
■ Screen type selection ��������������������������������������������������������������������� 12-4
■ Main dial brake adjustment ������������������������������������������������������������ 12-4
■ Frequency calibration (approximate) ���������������������������������������������� 12-5
■ Opening the receiver’s case ����������������������������������������������������������� 12-6
■ Opening the shield case ����������������������������������������������������������������� 12-6
■ UT-122 installation �������������������������������������������������������������������������� 12-7
■ Clock backup battery replacement ������������������������������������������������� 12-7
■ Fuse replacement ��������������������������������������������������������������������������� 12-8
D AC power input fuse ������������������������������������������������������������������� 12-8
D DC output fuse ��������������������������������������������������������������������������� 12-8
■ Resetting the CPU �������������������������������������������������������������������������� 12-9
■ Screen Saver Function ������������������������������������������������������������������� 12-9

Section 13 CONTROL COMMAND


■ Remote interface (CI-V) information . .............................................. 13-2
D CI-V connection example ............................................................ 13-2
D Data format . ................................................................................ 13-2
D Command table �������������������������������������������������������������������������� 13-3
D To send/read memory contents ������������������������������������������������ 13-10
D Codes for memory name, bank name, opening message,
and clock 2 name contents ������������������������������������������������������� 13-10
D Offset frequency setting ������������������������������������������������������������ 13-10
D Tone squelch frequency setting ������������������������������������������������ 13-10
D DTCS squelch code setting ������������������������������������������������������ 13-10
D NAC squelch code setting �������������������������������������������������������� 13-11
D Selective squelch code settings ����������������������������������������������� 13-11
D Color setting ���������������������������������������������������������������������������� 13-11
D Data mode with filter width setting ������������������������������������������� 13-11

Section 14 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS


■ Specifications ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 14-2
D General ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 14-2
D Receiver ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 14-3
■ Options ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 14-4

Section 15 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE


■ General ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 15-2
■ Caution ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 15-2
■ Preparation ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 15-3
D Firmware and firm utility ������������������������������������������������������������� 15-3
D File downloading ����������������������������������������������������������������������� 15-3
■ Firmware update— CF memory card ��������������������������������������������� 15-4
■ Firmware update— PC ������������������������������������������������������������������� 15-6
D Connections �������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 15-6
D IP address setting ����������������������������������������������������������������������� 15-7
D Updating from the PC ����������������������������������������������������������������� 15-8

ix
PANEL DESCRIPTION Section 1
■ Front panel ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 1-2
■ Rear panel �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 1-10
■ LCD display ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 1-12
■ Screen menu arrangement ������������������������������������������������������������� 1-14

1-1
1 PANEL DESCRIPTION

■ Front panel
i o !0 !1 !2

q
w
e
r

!3 !4 !5
q POWER SWITCH [POWER] (p. 3-2) r TIMER SWITCH [TIMER] (p. 10-3)
➥ Turns the sleep or daily timer function ON or
Turn the internal power supply ON before turning
OFF.
the unit ON from the front panel. The internal power
• The [TIMER] indicator above this switch lights green
supply switch is located on the rear panel. (p. 3-2) when the timer is in use.
➥ Push to turn the receiver power ON. ➥ Enters timer set mode when pushed and held for
• The [POWER] indicator above this switch lights green 1 sec.
when powered ON.
➥ Push for 1 sec. to turn the receiver power OFF. t RECORDER REMOTE JACK [REC REMOTE]
• The [POWER] indicator lights orange when the re- Controls the operation of a tape recorder for record-
ceiver is OFF when the internal power supply is ing. Connects to the REMOTE jack on a tape re-
switched ON. corder.

w REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH [LOCAL] y RECORDER JACK [REC OUT]


Push to cancel remote control operation from a PC Outputs an audio signal. Connect to the AUX or
via a CI-V data. LINE IN jack on a tape recorder.
• The [REMOTE] indicator lights orange while in remote
control operation. u HEADPHONE JACK [PHONES]
• When the [REMOTE] indicator lights orange, all dials, Accepts standard 3.5 (d) mm (1⁄8) stereo head-
keys or switches other than this switch are disabled. phones.
• Output power: 40 mW with an 8 Ω load.
e PANEL LOCK SWITCH [PANEL LOCK] (p. 9-2) • When headphones are connected, the internal speaker
➥ Push to turn the panel lock function ON or OFF. or connected external speaker does not function.
The panel lock function locks all dials (depends on
set mode setting on p. 11-10), keys and switches
other than [POWER] and [PANEL LOCK].
• The [PANEL LOCK] indicator above this switch lights
green when the panel lock is in use.
• The dial lock function is also available.
➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to turn the panel lock
with display sleep function ON.
• Pushing [PANEL LOCK] turns this function OFF.
• The [PANEL LOCK] indicator above this switch lights
green and the display turns OFF when the sleep
function is in use.

1-2
PANEL DESCRIPTION 1

i SQUELCH CONTROL [SQUELCH] (p. 3-8) !1 AGC CONTROL [AGC] (p. 5-10)


Adjusts the squelch threshold level. The squelch Adjusts the continuously-variable AGC circuit time
disables output from the speaker (closed condition) constant.
when no signal is received. • To use [AGC] control, push the appropriate band’s
• The squelch control is particularly effective for FM or [AGC VR/OFF] ([AGC VR] indicator lights green).
AM. It is also available for other modes.
• 11 to 12 o’clock position is recommended for any setting Slow
of the [SQL] control.
Noise squelch Fast

Squelch
threshold
S-meter !2 AGC SWITCH [AGC VR/OFF] (p. 5-10)
Deep squelch ➥ Push to toggle [AGC] control usage ON or OFF.
Squelch • Use [AGC] control to set the AGC time constant when
is open. switched ON.
Shallow
Shallow Deep • The [AGC VR] indicator above this switch lights green
when the control is ON.
➥ Turns the AGC function OFF when pushed and
o PASSBAND TUNING CONTROLS [TWIN PBT] held for 1 sec.
(p. 5-11)
Adjusts the receiver’s IF filter “passband width” via !3 AUTO NOTCH SWITCH [ANF] (p. 5-16)
the DSP. ➥ Turns the auto notch function ON or OFF when
• Passband width and shift frequency are shown on the pushed in SSB, AM, FM and WFM mode.
multifunction display. • “ AN ” appears when auto notch is in use.
• Push and hold [PBT CLEAR] for 1 sec. to clear the PBT
settings. !4 MANUAL NOTCH SWITCHES [NOTCH1]/
• The PBT is adjustable in 50 Hz steps in the SSB/CW/ [NOTCH2] (p. 5-16)
FSK modes, and 200 Hz in the AM mode. In this time, ➥ Turns the manual notch function ON or OFF
the shift value changes in 25 Hz steps in the SSB/CW/ when pushed in SSB, CW, AM and FSK mode.
FSK modes, and 100 Hz in the AM mode. • “ MN1 ” or “ MN2 ” appear when manual notch is in
• These controls function as an IF shift control. use.
➥ Switches the manual notch characteristics be-
(PBT1) (PBT2)
tween wide, middle and narrow when pushed
and held for 1 sec.
✔ What is the notch function?
The notch function eliminates unwanted CW or AM carrier
tones while preserving the desired voice signal. The DSP cir-
cuit automatically adjusts the notch frequency to effectively
– + eliminate unwanted tones.

!5 MANUAL NOTCH FILTER CONTROLS


[NOTCH1]/[NOTCH2] (p. 5-16)
Varies the “notch” frequency of the manual notch
filter to reject an interfering signal while the manual
notch function is ON.
High cut Center Low cut
• Notch filter center frequency:
SSB : –1060 Hz to 4040 Hz
✔ What is the PBT control? CW : C  W pitch freq. + 2540 Hz to CW pitch freq.
The PBT function electronically modifies the IF passband –2540 Hz
width to reject interference. This receiver uses the DSP cir- AM : –5100 Hz to 5100 Hz
cuit for the PBT function.
NOTCH1
NOTCH2
!0 PBT CLEAR SWITCH [PBT CLEAR] (p. 5-11) Higher
Push and hold for 1 sec. to clear the PBT settings. Lower frequency
• The [PBT CLEAR] indicator above this switch lights frequency
when PBT is in use.

1-3
1 PANEL DESCRIPTION

■ Front panel (continued)

!6
!7
!8

!9
@0

@1 @2 @3 @4 @5

!6 NOISE REDUCTION SWITCH [NR] (p. 5-16) !9 NOISE REDUCTION LEVEL CONTROL
Push to switch the DSP noise reduction ON or [NR LEVEL] (outer control; p. 5-16)
OFF. Adjusts the DSP noise reduction level when noise
• The [NR] indicator above this switch lights green when reduction is in use. Set for maximum readability.
the function is activated. • To use this control, noise reduction must be ON.

!7 NOISE BLANKER SWITCH [NB] (p. 5-15) Increases


➥ Selects from noise blanker 1, 2, or OFF when
pushed. The noise blanker reduces pulse-type
noise such as that generated by automobile ig- Decreases
nition systems. This function cannot be used for
FM, WFM, P25 modes or non-pulse-type noise. @0 NOISE BLANKER CONTROL [NB LEVEL]
• The [NB] indicator above this switch lights green and (inner control; p. 5-15)
“ NB1 ” or “ NB2 ” appears on the display when the Adjust the noise blanker threshold level.
function is activated. • To use this control, either noise blanker must be ON.
➥ Enters blank-width set mode when pushed and
held for 1 sec. Deep

!8 AUDIO PEAK FILTER/TWIN PEAK FILTER


SWITCH [APF/TPF] Shallow
➥ Push to turn the audio peak filter ON or OFF dur-
ing CW mode operation. (p. 4-9) @1 RF GAIN CONTROL [RF] (outer control; p. 3-8)
➥ Push to turn the twin peak filter ON or OFF dur- Adjusts the RF gain level.
ing FSK mode operation. (p. 4-11) While rotating the RF gain control, you may hear
• “ APF ” appears when audio peak filter is in use. noise. This comes from the DSP unit and does
• “ TPF ” appears when twin peak filter is in use.
not indicate a malfunction.
➥ During CW mode operation, push and hold for
1 sec. to select the APF passband width from 80, Sensitivity
160 and 320 Hz. (p. 4-9) increases

Sensitivity
decreases

1-4
PANEL DESCRIPTION 1

@2 AF CONTROL [AF] (inner control; p. 3-8) ➥ S elects the attenuator when pushed.
Varies the audio output level of the speaker or (p. 5-9)
headphones. • HF bands: 6, 12, 18, 24, 30 dB.
• 30–1150 MHz: 10, 20, 30 dB.
Audio output • 1150–3335 MHz: 20 dB only.
increases
➥ Turns OFF the attenuator when pushed
and held for 1 sec. (p. 5-9)
Audio output
decreases ✔ What is the attenuator?
The attenuator prevents a desired signal from distorting
@3 BASS RESPONSE CONTROL [BASS] when very strong signals are near the receiving frequency,
(outer control; p. 3-9) or when very strong electric fields, such as from a broad-
Adjusts the bass response of the audio output. casting station, are near your location.

Bass level ➥
  Selects one of 3 IF filter settings.
increases ➥ Enters the filter set screen when pushed
and held for 1 sec.
Bass level
decreases ➥ Activates and selects fast, middle or slow
AGC time constant when pushed.
@4 TREBLE RESPONSE CONTROL [TREBLE]
(p. 5-10)
(inner control; p. 3-9) • In FM, WFM or P25 mode, only “FAST” is
Adjusts the treble response of the audio output. available.
• “VR (volume)” indicates that AGC time con-
Treble level
stant depends on [AGC] control.
increases
➥ Enters the AGC set mode when pushed
and held for 1 sec. (p. 5-10)
Treble level
decreases AGC time constant can be set from 0.1 to 8.0 sec.
(depends on mode), or turned ­OFF. When AGC is
@5 MULTIFUNCTION SWITCHES “OFF,” the S-meter does not function.
Push to select the functions indicated in the LCD
✔ What is the AGC?
display to the right of these switches. The AGC controls receiver gain to produce a constant audio
• Functions vary depending on the operating condition. output level, even when the received signal strength varies
➥ While operating HF bands, selects the dramatically. Select “FAST” for tuning and then select “MID”
antenna connector from HF ANT 1, HF or “SLOW” depending on the receiving conditions.
ANT 2 and HF ANT 3 when pushed.
(p. 9-3) ➥ S witches between the tone squelch,
• During 30–1150 MHz operation, only ANT 1 DTCS squelch function and no-tone op-
is available. eration when pushed in FM mode.
• During 1150–3335 MHz operation, only ANT (p. 4-4)
2 is available. ➥ Enters the tone set mode when pushed
➥ Turns the antenna control voltage ON and held for 1 sec. in FM, FSK mode.
and OFF form [ANT SEL] when pushed (pgs. 4-4, 4-12)
and held for 1 sec. (p. 9-3)
➥ P ush to toggle the CW pitch setting
➥ Selects one of 2 receive RF preamps or screen ON and OFF in CW mode.
bypasses them. (p. 5-9) (p.4-9)
● HF bands
• “P. AMP1” activates 10 dB preamp. (Requires optional UT-122)
• “P. AMP2” activates high-gain preamp. ➥ Switches the digital squelch between
● Above 30 MHz bands NAC squelch, selective squelch and
• Only “P. AMP” is available. OFF in P25 mode. (p. 4-19)
✔ What is the preamp? ➥ Enters the code set mode when pushed
The preamp amplifies received signals in the front end circuit and held for 1 sec. in P25 mode.
to improve S/N ratio and sensitivity. Select “P. AMP1” or “P. (p. 4-19)
AMP2” when receiving weak signals.
➥ Push to switch the voice squelch control
function ON and OFF; useful for scan-
ning. (p. 8-3)
1-5
1 PANEL DESCRIPTION

■ Front panel (continued)


@6 @7 @8 @9 #0 #1 #2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7 #8 #9 $0

$1 $2 $3 $4

@6 LCD FUNCTION DISPLAY (p. 1-10) @9 MEMORY TRANSFER SWITCH [M≈V] (p. 7-5)
Shows the operating frequency, function switch Transfers the memory contents to VFO when
menus, spectrum scope screen, memory channel pushed and held for 1 sec.
screen, set mode settings, etc. • This function is available both in VFO and memory
modes.
@7 RECEIVE INDICATOR [RECEIVE]
Lights green while receiving a signal and when the #0 MEMORY SWITCH [MEMO] (p.7-3)
squelch is open. ➥ Selects the memory mode when pushed.
• After pushing one to three digit (0 to 999), pushing
@8 TUNING STEP SWITCHES [▲UP]/[▼DOWM] the switch selects a memory channel.
(p. 3-5) ➥ Memory bank limit function ON or OFF when
➥ Select the tuning step for the main dial. Push pushed and held for 1 sec.
[▲UP] to select a larger tuning step; push
#1 REMOTE CONTROL INDICATOR [REMOTE]
[▼DOWN] to select a smaller tuning step.
• 1 Hz, 10 Hz, 100 Hz, 1 kHz, 2.5 kHz, 5 kHz, 6.25 Lights yellow when a command is received from a
kHz, 9 kHz, 10 kHz, 12.5 kHz, 20 kHz, 25 kHz, 100 PC via CI-V data.
kHz and 1 MHz are selectable. • When this indicator lights yellow, all dials, keys or
• Programmable tuning steps can be set between 0.1 switches other than [LOCAL] are disabled.
and 999.9 kHz in 0.1 kHz steps. • This indicator goes OFF, when [LOCAL] is pushed.
➠ To set programmable tuning steps, enter the de-
sired steps via the keypad, then push [YUP] or
#2 DIAL LOCK INDICATOR [LOCK] (p. 9-2)
[ZDOWN]. Lights orange when the dial lock function is acti-
➥ Push and hold [▲UP] (or [▼DOWN]) for 1 sec. to vated.
enter the tuning step select screen.
• Unwanted tuning step for each operating mode can
be skipped in the tuning step select.

1-6
PANEL DESCRIPTION 1

#3 VFO SWITCH [VFO] $1 LCD FUNCTION SWITCHES [F-1]–[F-7]


Selects the VFO mode when pushed. (p. 3-3) Push to select the function indicated in the LCD dis-
• After pushing a digit switch (0 to 9), push this switch play above these switches.
selects a VFO mode (VFO-0 to VFO-9). • Functions vary depending on the operating condition.

#4 KEYPAD (pgs. 3-3, 3-4, 7-3) $2 MINI SPECTRUM SCOPE SWITCH [M.SCOPE]
Enters a frequency or memory channel. Pushing (p. 5-6)
[ENT], [VFO] or [MEMO] ends keypad input. ➥ Turns the mini spectrum scope screen ON or
• e.g. to enter 14.195 MHz, push [1] [4] [•] [1] [9] [5] OFF.
[ENT]. • The mini spectrum scope screen can be displayed
with another screen, such as memory or set mode
#5 ENTER SWITCH [ENT] screen, simultaneously.
Enters input frequency. (pgs. 3-4) ➥ Turns the spectrum scope screen ON when
pushed and held for 1 sec.
#6 MEMORY WRITE SWITCH [MW] (p. 7-4)
Stores the selected readout frequency and operat- $3 MODE SWITCHES
ing mode into the displayed memory channel when Selects the desired mode. (p. 3-7)
pushed and held for 1 sec. • Announces selected mode via the speech synthesizer.
• This function is available both in VFO and memory (p. 11-11)
modes.
➥ Selects FM mode.
#7 MEMORY CLEAR SWITCH [M-CL] (p. 7-7)
Push and hold to clear the contents of displayed ➥ Selects WFM mode.
WFM
memory channel.

#8 SPEAKER ➥ Selects AM and S-AM modes alternately.


Outputs audio signals. ➥ S witches S-AM(D), S-AM(U) and S-
AM(L) mode when pushed and held for
#9 1/4-SPEED TUNING SWITCH [1/4] 1 sec. in S-AM mode.
➥ Push to turn the 1⁄4-speed tuning function ON or
OFF in CW and FSK modes. (p. 3-6) SSB/CW ➥ Switches between SSB and CW mode.
• “ 1⁄ 4 ” appears when 1⁄4 function is in use. ➥ Switches between LSB and USB mode
• 1⁄4 function sets dial rotation to 1⁄4 of normal speed when pushed and held for 1 sec. in SSB
for fine tuning. mode.
➥ Push and hold to turn the dial click function ON ➥ Switches between CW and CW-R (CW
or OFF. (p. 9-3) reverse) mode when pushed and held for
1 sec. in CW mode.
$0 AFC/AUTOMATIC TUNING SWITCH
[AFC•AUTOTUNE] FSK ➥ Selects FSK and FSK-R (FSK reverse)
➥ Turns the AFC function ON or OFF in FM or modes alternately.
WFM modes. DIGITAL ➥ Selects Digital (P25) mode. (Requires
• “ AFC ” appears when AFC function is in use. optional UT-122.)
➥ Turns the automatic tuning function ON or OFF
in AM, SSB and CW modes. $4 DISPLAY SWITCH [DISPLAY]
• “ AUTO TUNE ” blinks when autotune function is acti- ➥ Push to toggle the external input screen between
vate. mini video screen, full video screen, or OFF.
IMPORTANT! • If no signal inputs from [VIDEO IN], black screen ap-
pears.
When receiving a weak signal, or receiving a
➥ Enter the display set mode menu screen when
signal with interference, the automatic tuning
pushed and held for 1 sec.
function may tune the receiver to an unde-
sired signal.

1-7
1 PANEL DESCRIPTION

■ Front panel (continued)

^0

%9

$5 $6 $7 $8 $9 %0 %1 %2 %3 %4 %5 %6 %7 %8

$5 DIMMER SWITCH [DIMMER] (p.11-26) $8 VOICE MEMORY RECORD SWITCH [REC]


➥ Push to turn the dimmer function ON or OFF. ➥ Short recording; Push momentarily to record the
• When this function is ON, LEDs and LCD backlight signal received for the preset time period before
become dim according to the preset setting. [REC] was pushed. (p.6-5)
➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to reset the LCD setting • Starts recording again automatically.
to the default value with the dimmer function ON ➥ Regular recording; Push and hold for 1 sec. to
and OFF. record the received signal until recording is
stopped. (p. 6-3)
$6 LCD SET SWITCH [LCD SET] (p. 11-26) • Push and hold this switch for 1 sec. to stop record-
➥ Push to toggle the LCD setting screen ON or ing.
OFF.
• LCD contrast and backlight’s brightness can be set. $9 SHORT VOICE MEMORY PLAY BACK SWITCH
[PLAY] (p. 6-5)
$7 DUPLEX SWITCH [DUP] (p. 4-3) ➥ Plays back the audio previously recorded during
➥ Push to select the duplex function (DUP–, DUP+ the preset time period when pushed.
and OFF). ➥ Plays back all of the previously recorded audio
➥ Push and hold for 1 sec. to enter the offset fre- when pushed and held for 1 sec.
quency set mode.
%0 EXIT/SET SWITCH [EXIT/SET]
➥ Push to exit, or return to the previous screen dur-
ing spectrum scope, memory, scan or set mode
screen display.
➥ Displays set mode menu screen when pushed
and held for 1 sec.

1-8
PANEL DESCRIPTION 1

%1 MONITOR SWITCH [MONI] (pgs. 3-8, 4-4, 4-19)


➥ Push and hold to open the squelch manually.
• The [MONI] indicator appears on the display.
• While pushing and holding this switch, release any
other receiving functions such as the noise blanker
or ANF.
• While in a duplex operation, monitor the shifted fre-
quency.

%2 MAIN DIAL
Changes the displayed frequency, selects set mode
setting, etc.

%3 LOCK SWITCH [LOCK] (p. 9-2)


Push to turn the dial lock function ON or OFF.

%4 SPEECH SWITCH [SPCH] (p. 9-2)


➥ Push to announce the S-meter indication and the
selected readout frequency.
➥ The selected operating mode is also announced
when pushed and held for 1 sec.

%5 MEMORY DIAL [M-CH] (inner control; p. 7-3)


Rotate to select the desired memory channel.
• Memory channels can be selected both in VFO and
memory modes.

%6 MEMORY BANK DIAL [BANK]


(outer control; p. 7-3)
Rotate to select the desired memory bank.
• Memory banks can be selected both in VFO and mem-
ory modes.

%7 SCAN SPEED CONTROL [SPEED]


(inner control; p. 8-18)
Rotate to adjust the scan speed.

%8 SCAN DELAY CONTROL [DELAY]


(outer control; p. 8-18)
Rotate to adjust the desired scan delay time.
• This setting is effective when “DELAY” is selected for the
scan resume condition (%6).
• Scan delay time is adjustable between 2 sec. to 20 sec.

%9 SCAN RESUME SWITCHES [OFF]/[DELAY]/[∞ ]


(p. 8-17)
Push to select a scan resume condition.
• The [SCAN RESUME] indicator lights green above the
selected switch.

^0 SCAN START SWITCHES


(pgs. 8-5, 8-7 to 8-11, 8-13, 8-14)
Push to start the desired scan.

1-9
1 PANEL DESCRIPTION

■ Rear panel
q w e r t y u i o !0 !1 !2 !3 !4 !5 !6 !7

@9 @8 @7 @6 @5 @4 @3 @2 @1 @0 !9 !8

u LINE OUTPUT JACK [LINE OUT]


q EXTERNAL SPEAKER JACK [EXT-SP] (p. 2-6)
Audio output jack for tape recorder. The fixed audio
Connects an external speaker (4–8 Ω), if desired.
output level is set for a tape recorder AUX jack.
w ­DC OUTPUT JACK [DC OUTPUT 15V MAX 1A]
i RECORDER REMOTE JACK [REC REMOTE]
(p. 2-6)
Controls the operation of a tape recorder for re-
Outputs regulated 15 V DC (approx.) for external
cording. Connects to the REMOTE jack on a tape
equipment. Connected in parallel with 13.8 V out-
recorder.
puts of [ACC]. (max. 1 A total)
_ + o DETECTOR OUTPUT JACK [DET OUT]
_ Outputs the detector output signal.

e ACCESSORY SOCKET [ACC] (p. 2-6) !0 VIDEO INPUT JACK [VIDEO IN]
Enables connection of external equipment such as Accepts video signals for display on the LCD moni-
an automatic antenna selector, a TNC for data tor when the [DISPLAY] switch is ON.
communications, etc. !1 VIDEO OUTPUT JACK [VIDEO OUT]
• See p. 2-12 for socket information.
Outputs video signals when TV frequencies with
r ANTENNA SELECTOR VOLTAGE OUTPUT WFM mode are received. The NTSC M, PAL B/G,
JACK [ANT SEL] PAL I, PAL D and SECAM K system can be ac-
Outputs regulated 13.8 V DC (max. 100 mA) for cepted. (No signals come out for USA versions.)
external preamplifier or antenna selector, etc.
!2 SPARE JACK [SPARE] (p. 2-3)
t REFERENCE SIGNAL INPUT/OUTPUT No connection.
TERMINAL [REF I/O 10MHz–10dBm]
!3 IF OUTPUT JACK [IF OUT] (p. 2-3)
Inputs/outputs a 10 MHz reference signal.
Outputs a 10.7 MHz IF signal.
y SPEECH OUTPUT JACK [SPEECH OUT] (p. 2-9) Output level is the same level as an antenna input
Outputs an operating frequency, mode, S-meter in- signal or below (when the AGC function is acti-
dication and time with a synthesized voice when vated or attenuator is ON.)
pushing [SPCH] or scan stopped.
!4 DC-DC POWER SOCKET [DC-DC IN] (p. 2-6)
• Turn ON the “REC SPCH” in the others set mode to ac-
Accepts a regulated 13.5 to 15 V DC input. This
tivate this jack when scan stopped. (p. 11-11)
• Output level can be adjusted in ACC set mode. (p. 11-7) socket does not accept voltage from a non-regu-
lated power source such as a vehicle’s battery.

1-10
PANEL DESCRIPTION 1

!5 FUSE HOLDER [FUSE] (p. 12-8) @6 EXTERNAL DISPLAY TERMINAL


Holds a 4 A fuse (100 V/120 V versions) or 2 A [EXT-DISPLAY] (p. 2-10)
fuse (230 V/240 V versions) for internal AC power Connects to an external display monitor.
supply protection. Cuts off the AC input when • At least 800×600 pixel display is necessary.
over-current occurs.
@7 RS-232C TERMINAL [RS-232C] (p. 2-6)
 AUTION: Always use the correct fuse for AC
C Connects to a PC using a D-sub 9-pin RS-232C
input power. Using a fuse rated for a different cable.
input power may damege your house electrical Can be used for remote control of the IC-R9500
system or the receiver. without the optional CT-17, or the FSK decoded
signal output. The [RS-232C] interface is wired as
!6 AC POWER SOCKET [AC] (p. 2-5)
a modem (DCE).
Connects the supplied AC power cable to an AC
line-voltage receptacle. @8 CI-V REMOTE CONTROL JACK [REMOTE]
(p. 2-6)
!7 MAIN POWER SWITCH [I/O] (p. 3-2)
➥ Connects a PC via the optional CT-17 ci-v level
Turns the internal power supply ON or OFF.
converter for external control of the receiver.

!8 GROUND TERMINAL [GND] (p. 2-2) ➥ Used for transceive operation with another Icom
Connect this terminal to a ground to prevent elec- CI-V transceiver or receiver.
trical shocks, TVI, BCI and other problems.
@9 DATA SOCKET [DATA IN]
!9 HF ANTENNA CONNECTOR 1 [HF ANT 1] (pgs. 2-10, 2-12)
(p. 2-5) Outputs LCD monitor signals (NTSC system).
Accepts a 50 Ω antenna for HF bands with a PL-
259 plug connector.

@0 HF ANTENNA CONNECTOR 2 [HF ANT 2]


(p. 2-5)
Accepts a 500 Ω antenna for HF band with an RCA
connector.

@1 USB CONNECTOR [USB]


Connects USB equipment such as a memory
media, hub or keyboard.

@2 S/P DIF OUTPUT TERMINAL [S/P DIF OUT]


(p. 2-7)
Connects external equipment that supports S/P
DIF output.

@3 HF ANTENNA CONNECTOR 3/ANTENNA CON-


NECTOR 1 [ANT 1/HF ANT 3] (p. 2-5)
Accepts a 50 Ω antenna with a Type-N connector.
Covers the HF bands and 30–1150 MHz frequency
range.

@4 ETHERNET CONNECTOR [LAN] (pgs. 2-7, 15-6)


Connects to a PC through a LAN (Local Area Net-
work).

@5 ANTENNA CONNECTOR 2 [ANT 2] (p. 2-5)


Accepts a 50 Ω antenna with a Type-N connector.
Covers the 1150–3335 MHz frequency range.

1-11
1 PANEL DESCRIPTION

■ LCD display
@9 @8 @7 @6 @5 @4 @3 @2

@1
q @0
w !9
e !8
r !7
t !6
y !5
!4
u !3
i
!2
!1
o

!0

q RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication) METER w CENTER METER


(p. 3-10) Shows that the received signal is tuned to its
Shows the received signal strength. Four meter center frequency for FM, WFM or FSK modes.
types, S, dBµ, dBµ(EMF) and dBm meters are se- • FM/WFM modes • FSK mode
lectable.
• S-meter

e MODE INDICATOR (p. 3-7)


Shows the selected receive mode.
• dBµ meter r VFO/MEMORY INDICATOR (pgs. 3-3, 7-3)
Indicates the selected VFO number (VFO-0 to
VFO-9) or memory mode.

t IF FILTER INDICATOR (p. 5-12)


Shows the selected IF filter number.
• dBµ (EMF) meter
y FREQUENCY READOUTS
Shows the operating frequency.

u SELECT MEMORY CHANNEL INDICATOR (p. 8-12)


Indicates the displayed memory channel is set as
a select memory channel.
• dBm meter
i MEMORY CHANNEL READOUTS
➥ Shows the selected memory channel contents
in VFO mode.
➥ Shows the VFO contents in memory mode.

1-12
PANEL DESCRIPTION 1

o MULTIFUNCTION SWITCH GUIDE @0 CF CARD/USB-MEMORY INDICATOR (p. 11-16)


Indicates the function of the multifunction switches. ➥ “ CF ” appears when CF card is correctly con-
nected and blinks while CF card is active.
!0 LCD FUNCTION SWITCH GUIDE • This indicator is normally stayed ON.
Indicates the function of the LCD function switches
([F-1] – [F-7]). The IC-R9500 comes with 512MB CF card in-
stalled as an internal memory. If you would lik­e
!1 MULTIFUNCTION SCREEN to replace or uninstall the internal memory (CF
Shows the screens for the spectrum scope, voice card), ask your dealer for details.
recorder, memory channel list, scan, FSK decoder,
➥ “ USB ” appears when USB-Memory is con-
IF filter selection or set modes, etc.
nected, and blinks while it is active.
!2 TUNING STEP INDICATOR (p. 3-5)
@1 CLOCK READOUT (p. 10-2)
Shows the selected tuning step.
Shows the current time. Local and UTC time can
!3 1/4 FUNCTION INDICATOR (p. 3-6) be indicated at the same time.
Appears when the 1/4-speed tuning function is ac-
@2 NOISE REDUCTION INDICATOR (p. 5-16)
tivated in CW and FSK modes.
Appears when noise reduction function is in use.
!4 AUTOMATIC TUNE INDICATOR (p. 5-17)
@3 BANDPASS FILTER INDICATOR
“ AUTO TUNE ” blinks during automatic tuning. This
Appears when the narrow filter (500 Hz or less) is
feature is active in AM, SSB and CW mode.
selected during CW or FSK operation.
!5 MEMORY CHANNEL INDICATOR (p. 7-3)
@4 PASSBAND WIDTH INDICATOR (p. 5-11)
Indicates the selected memory channel number.
Graphically displays the passband width for twin
!6 TUNING DIGIT INDICATOR (p. 3-5) PBT operation and center frequency for IF shift op-
Shows the tuneable digit when rotating the main eration.
dial.
@5 AUDIO PEAK FILTER INDICATOR (p. 4-9)
!7 TONE/DTCS/NAC/SELECTIVE SQUELCH Appears when the audio peak filter function is in use.
INDICATOR This function is available in CW mode
➥ “ TSQL ” or “ DTCS ” appears when the tone
@6 SHIFT FREQUENCY INDICATOR (p. 5-11)
squelch or DTCS squelch is set in FM mode. Shows the shift frequency of the IF filter.
(p.  4-4)
➥ “ NAC ” o r “ SEL ” a p p e a r s w h e n t h e N AC @7 NOTCH FILTER INDICATOR (p. 5-16)
squelch or selective squelch is selected in P25 ➥ “ AN ” appears when the auto notch function is
mode. (Requires optional UT-122.) (p.4-19) in use. This function is available in FM, WFM,
AM and SSB modes.
!8 BANK INDICATOR (p. 7-3) ➥ “ MN1 ” or “ MN2 ” appears when the manual
Appears when the bank limit function is in use and notch filter function is in use. This function is avail-
indicates the selected bank number. able in AM, SSB, CW and FSK mode.
• B ANK-0 to BANK-9, BANK-A (AUTO MW), BANK-S
(SKIP) and BANK-P (SCAN EDGE) are selectable. @8 BAND WIDTH INDICATOR (p. 5-11)
Shows the passband width of the IF filter.
!9 NOISE BLANKER INDICATOR (p. 5-15)
“ NB1 ” or “ NB2 ” appears when either noise @9 DUPLEX INDICATOR (p. 4-3)
blanker 1 or noise blanker 2 is ON. This function is “ DUP– ” or “ DUP+ ” appears when the negative duplex
not available for FM, WFM or P25 mode. or positive duplex operation is selected, respectively.

1-13
1 PANEL DESCRIPTION

■ Screen menu arrangement


The following screens can be selected from the start Pushing [EXIT/SET] several times returns to the start
up screen. Choose the desired screen using the fol- up screen. See p. 11-3 for set mode arrangement.
lowing chart.

• Spectrum scope screen (p. 5-2) • Memory channel screen (p. 7-4)

• Voice recorder screen (p. 6-3) • Scan screen (p. 5-5)

• FSK decoder screen (p. 4-14) • Set mode menu screen (p. 11-2)

1-14
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS Section 2
■ Unpacking ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-2
■ Selecting a location �������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-2
■ Grounding ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-2
■ Antenna connection �������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-3
■ TV jumper cable connection (except for USA versions)�������������������� 2-4
■ Carrying handle attachment ������������������������������������������������������������� 2-4
■ Rack mounting handle detachment �������������������������������������������������� 2-4
■ Required connections ����������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-5
D Rear panel ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 2-5
■ Advanced connections ��������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-6
D Front panel ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-6
D Rear panel—1 ������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 2-6
D Rear panel—2 ������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 2-7
■ Tape recorder connections ��������������������������������������������������������������� 2-8
D Recording from the front panel or rear panel ������������������������������� 2-8
D Separately recording audio and frequency ���������������������������������� 2-9
■ Monitor display connection ������������������������������������������������������������� 2-10
■ Transceive function ������������������������������������������������������������������������� 2-10
■ FSK and AFSK (SSTV) connections ���������������������������������������������� 2-11
■ Accessory connector information ��������������������������������������������������� 2-12

CAUTION: The receiver weighs approx. 20 kg (44 lb). Al-


ways have two people available to carry, lift or
turn over the receiver.
2-1
2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

■ Unpacking
After unpacking, immediately report any damage to the
delivering carrier or dealer. Keep the shipping cartons.

For a description and a diagram of accessory equip-


ment included with the IC-R9500, see ‘Supplied ac-
cessories’ on p. iv of this manual.

■ Selecting a location
 elect a location for the receiver that allows adequate
S
air circulation and access to the front and rear panels.
Do not place in areas subject to extreme heat, cold, or
vibrations, or near TV sets, radios and other electro-
magnetic sources.

■ Grounding
To prevent electrical shock, television interference
(TVI), broadcast interference (BCI) and other prob-
lems, ground the receiver through the GROUND ter-
minal on the rear panel.

For best results, connect a heavy gauge wire or strap


to a long earth-sunk copper rod. Make the distance
between the [GND] terminal and ground as short as
possible.

R WARNING! NEVER connect the [GND]


terminal to a gas or electric pipe, since the connec-
tion could cause an explosion or electric shock.

2-2
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS 2

■ Antenna connection
 our antenna plays a very important role in receiver
Y
operation. If the antenna is poor, your receiver cannot
give you the best performance.

The IC-R9500 requires at least 2 antennas (ANT 1/HF


ANT 3, ANT 2) for full coverage from 100 kHz to 3335
MHz. Select an antenna, such as a well matched 50 Ω
antenna and feedline. When you wish to use a long
wire antenna for short wave bands, use one as long as
possible (at least 10 m, 32.8 ft).

CAUTION: Protect your receiver from lightning by


using a lightning arrestor.

PL-259 CONNECTOR INSTALLATION EXAMPLE

q e
30 mm solder solder

Slide the coupling ring Slide the connector


down. Strip the cable body on and solder it.
Coupling ring 10 mm (soft solder) jacket and tin the
braid.

w r
Strip the cable as Screw the coupling
10 mm Soft
solder
shown at left. Tin the ring onto the connector
centerr conductor. body.
1–2 mm

30 mm ≈ 9⁄8 in 10 mm ≈ 3⁄8 in 1–2 mm ≈ 1⁄16 in

TYPE-N CONNECTOR INSTALLATION EXAMPLE


q e
Nut Rubber gasket Slide the nut, washer, Solder hole Tin the center conductor.
15 mm
rubber gasket and Install the center conductor
clamp over the pin and solder it.
Clamp coaxial cable, then No space
Washer cut the end of the
cable evenly.

w 3 mm 6 mm
r
Plug body
Strip the cable and Carefully slide the plug
fold the braid back body into place aligning
over the clamp. the center conductor pin
Center conductor on the cable. Tighten the
nut onto the plug body.
• Be sure the center pin is
flush with the end of the
plug body.

15 mm ≈ 19⁄32 in 6 mm ≈ 1⁄4 in 3 mm ≈ 1⁄8 in

2-3
2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

■ TV jumper cable connection (except for USA versions)


Connect the RCA cable between [VIDEO IN] and
[VIDEO OUT].

When connecting external video equipment, connect


the unit between [VIDEO IN] and [VIDEO OUT] con-
nectors.

■ Carrying handle attachment


q Remove the 2 screws from side panel for both
side.

w Attach the supplied Carrying handles as shown at


left.

FH M4×16 mm FH: Flat head

■ Rack mounting handle detachment


When removing the rack mounting handles, use the
supplied screws for attach the side plates.

q Remove the 6 screws from the rack mounting han-


dles for both side. And remove the rack mounting
handles and side plates.
FH: Flat head
q PH: Pan head w Attach the removed side plates to original position,
then tighten the supplied 4 screws (FH M4×12).
Tighten the supplied 2 screw (PH M4×8) for hiding
screw holes for both side.

FH M4×16 mm  AUTION: NEVER replace the any other than


C
specified screws for side plate atachment or hid-
w ing screw holes. If long screw is used, it is caused
to damage the receiver’s inside board.
FH M4×12 mm

PH M4×8 mm

2-4
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS 2

■ Required connections
D Rear panel

[VIDEO IN], [VIDEO OUT] Ground (p. 2-2) AC outlet


TV jumper cable must be Ground connection R WARNING!
connected when internal TV tuner Use the supplied
and LCD are in use (except USA AC power cable
versions). only.
No signals come out from [VIDEO
OUT] for USA versions.

Antenna 1, 2 (p. 2-3) HF Antenna 1, 2, 3 (p. 2-3)


[Example]: HF ANT1 for 3.5, 7 MHz bands, HF ANT 2 for 14, 18
Connects the VHF, MHz bands, ANT3 for 24, 28 MHz bands.
UHF wide band anten-
nas.

ANT1: 30–1150 MHz,


ANT2: 1150–3335 MHz

Select the active antenna connector. (p.9-3)

2-5
2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

■ Advanced connections
D Front panel
[REC REMOTE],
[REC OUT] (p. 2-8)
Connects a tape re-
corder or other au-
dio equipment.

Headphones
Accepts headphones
with 8–16 Ω impe-
dance.

D Rear panel—1

External speaker (p. 14-4) [DC OUTPUT] [DC-DC IN]


Outputs regulated 15 V (approx.) Connects an external pow-
DC for external equipment power er supply (DC 13.5—15 V at
supply. (max. 1 A capacity) least 10 A).
SP-20 Only regulated DC power
(option) may be connected.
ACC socket
(pgs.2-12)

DATA socket Antenna 1, 2


(pgs.2-12) Connects a pre-amplifier,
converter, etc.

[REMOTE], [RS-232C] (p. 13-2)


Used for computer control and transceive
operation.
The optional CT-17 is required when con-
necting a PC to [REMOTE].

2-6
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS 2

D Rear panel—2

[METER] ANT SEL Video equipment


Connects an external
Connects a video
meter, etc.
recorder, etc.
Meter

When the [ANT] switch is ON:


13.8 V DC output 100 mA max.
MOUT
7 6
* No signals come out from
3 8 1 [VIDEO OUT] for USA
5
2
4
[ACC]
GND versions.

External Display [S/P DIF OUT] [USB]


Connects a PC-style Connects a PC Connects a USB
monitor display (at least for audio signal equipment such as
800¥600 resolution). data (48 kHz, memory, hub or
Video output signal can 16-bit) output. keyboard.
be turned ON and OFF
in set mode (p. 11-9)

Ethernet connector (p. 15-6)


For Ferrite bead installation (example: LAN cable)
Connects a PC
LAN
via a LAN for CPU
socket
firmware update.

2-7
2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

■ Tape recorder connections


The [REC REMOTE] jack is grounded when a signal The [REC OUT] or [LINE OUT] jack has 200 mV
is received and squelch opens. If a tape recorder rms/4.7 kΩ output for connection to other audio
has a control terminal, this jack can be used for equipment.
recording control. (2 A/DC max.)

D Recording from the front panel or rear panel


The [REC REMOTE] jack is grounded when a signal The [REC OUT] or [LINE OUT] jack has 200 mV
is received and squelch opens. If a tape recorder rms/4.7 kΩ output for connection to other audio
has a control terminal, this jack can be used for equipment.
recording control. (2 A/DC max.)

• Recording from the front panel


When you wish to control a tape FRONT
recorder via the REMOTE jack.
[REMOTE] jack [REC
REMOTE]
[AUX IN] or
[LINE IN] jack [REC OUT]
200 mVrms
4.7 kΩ

• Recording from the rear panel [REC REMOTE]


When you wish to control a tape
[LINE OUT] recorder via the REMOTE jack.
200 mVrms
4.7 kΩ REAR

[REMOTE] jack

[AUX IN] or [LINE IN] jack

2-8
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS 2

D Separately recording audio and frequency


When using a stereo tape recorder for recording,
received audio and a frequency with a synthesized
voice can be separately recorded.

When recording this way, you can search ahead of


the audio signal recorded in the tape recorder using
the frequency recording channel search.

[REC REMOTE]
When you wish to control a tape
[LINE OUT] recorder via the REMOTE jack.
200 mVrms
4.7 kΩ
[SPEECH OUT] REAR
200 mVrms
[REMOTE] jack 4.7 kΩ

[AUX IN] jacks L and R

• Be sure the “REC SPEECH” item is turned ON, and “SPEECH Mix” item is select OFF in the others
set mode (p. 11-11).

2-9
2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

■ Monitor display connection


A monitor display can be connected to the IC-R9500  OTE: Video output from [DATA IN] is available an
N
via the [DATA IN] socket and [EXT-DISPLAY]. You can NTSC system only.
monitor the LCD monitor information on a large size
display.

The IC-R9500 includes a picture signal decoder.


When connecting a TV set equipped with a VIDEO
IN jack, you can monitor TV signals such as amateur
TV.
External Display
Connects a PC-style
monitor display (at least
800×600 resolution).
Video output signal can
be turned ON and OFF
in display set mode.
[EXT-DISPLAY] (p. 11-9)

*1 Video output signal can be selected


VIDEO 3
7
8
6
1
‘VIDEO IN’ or ‘LCD’ in display set
5
2
4
*1LCD output including TV signal (Video) mode. (p. 11-25)
GND
*2TV signal only *2 No signals come out from [VIDEO OUT]
for USA versions.
[DATA IN] [VIDEO OUT] TV set

[VIDEO IN]

or

■ Transceive function
Icom CI-V transceivers or receivers can be connect- * When a set frequency is out-of-range for one of the con-
ed via the [REMOTE] jack. The frequency and mode nected transceivers or receivers, the connected radio’s
settings will follow* when either radio is changed. frequency/mode does not change.

[ACC]
Pin 3 Connect [ACC] socket when the IC-
R9500 is connected with transceiver.
This connection mutes the IC-R9500
when transceiver transmits.

Connect to [REMOTE] jack

• Be sure the “CI-V Transceive” item is turned ON in the others set mode (p. 11-14).

2-10
INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS 2

■ FSK and AFSK (SSTV) connections


To connect a terminal unit, TNC or scan converter, • Frequency settings depend on the mode used.
refer to the diagram below. FM mode:
[Setting frequency (displayed freq.)] = [Desired
q Connect a terminal unit as below. freq.]
w S elect FSK mode (or USB, CW modes for HF USB mode:
band data communications). [Setting frequency (displayed freq.)] = 
e S et the receiver to the desired frequency as [Desired freq.] – [Center of Mark and Space freq.]
shown to the right. CW narrow mode:
r Set the connected terminal unit to the appropriate [Setting frequency (displayed freq.)] = [Desired
settings. freq.] – [Center of Mark and Space freq.] + [600
• Refer to the terminal unit’s instructions. Hz]
LSB mode (for amateur RTTY):
 he narrow filter settings may not pass FSK sig-
T [Setting frequency (displayed freq.)] = [Desired
nals. Be sure to select the appropriate IF filters freq.] + [Mark freq.]
corresponding to the signal width. (p. 5-12)

• When using a PC application


Rear panel view
[ACC]
7 6 SQLS SQELCH IN Connect to serial port, parallel
3 8 1 port, speaker jack, and line
5
2
4 IN/OUT jack, etc.
See the instruction manual of the
GND GND
application for details.
AF AUDIO INPUT

• When using a TNC


Rear panel view RS-232C
[ACC]
7 6 SQLS SQELCH IN
3 8 1
5 4
2

GND GND
Personal computer
AF AUDIO INPUT
TNC or scan converter

2-11
2 INSTALLATION AND CONNECTIONS

■ Accessory connector information


ACC PIN No. NAME DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS
1 ANTS Outputs 5 V when the [ANTENNA] Output current : Less than 100 µA
switch is ON. Output impedance : 10 kΩ
2 GND Connects to ground.
SEND When grounded, attenuator activates GROUND level : –0.5 to +0.8 V
3
and then audio is muted. Input current : Less than 20 mA
7 6 4 NC No connection
3 8 1
5 AF AF detector output. Output impedance : 47 kΩ
5 4
2 Fixed, regardless of [AF] position in Output level : 100–300 mV rms
default settings. (see notes below)
6 SQLS S
 quelch output. Squelch open : Less than 0.3 V/5 mA
Goes to ground when squelch opens. Squelch closed : More than 6.0 V/100 µA
7 13.8 V 13.8 V output when power is ON. Output current : 100 mA
MOUT Output S-meter level. Output voltage : 0 to approx. 4 V
8
Output impedance : 10 kΩ

DATA IN PIN No. NAME DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATIONS


1 DATA —
IN
2 GND Connects to video ground.
3 VIDEO Video signal output. Output level : 1 V p-p ±0.2 V
7 6
(NTSC system only) Output impedance : 75 Ω
3 8 1
5 4 4 GND —
2
5 NC No connection
6 DATA —
OUT
7, 8 NC No connection

 OTE: If the beep level limit is in use, the beep


N
tone decreases from the fixed level when the [AF]
control is rotated above a specified level. (p. 11-6)

2-12
BASIC OPERATIONS Section 3
■ When first applying power (CPU resetting) �������������������������������������� 3-2
■ Initial settings ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 3-2
■ Selecting VFO mode ������������������������������������������������������������������������ 3-3
■ Selecting memory mode ������������������������������������������������������������������� 3-3
■ Frequency setting ����������������������������������������������������������������������������� 3-4
D Direct frequency entry with the keypad ���������������������������������������� 3-4
D Tuning with the main dial �������������������������������������������������������������� 3-5
D Selecting a tuning step ����������������������������������������������������������������� 3-5
D Auto tuning step function �������������������������������������������������������������� 3-6
D 1⁄4 tuning step function ����������������������������������������������������������������� 3-6
■ Operating mode selection ���������������������������������������������������������������� 3-7
■ Volume setting ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 3-8
■ RF gain adjustment �������������������������������������������������������������������������� 3-8
■ Squelch level adjustment ������������������������������������������������������������������ 3-8
■ Audio tone adjustment ���������������������������������������������������������������������� 3-9
D Treble level adjustment ����������������������������������������������������������������� 3-9
D Bass level adjustment ������������������������������������������������������������������� 3-9
■ Meter indication selection ��������������������������������������������������������������� 3-10
D Meter type selection ������������������������������������������������������������������� 3-10

3-1
3 BASIC OPERATIONS

■ When first applying power (CPU resetting)


Before first applying power, make sure all connections
[I/O] required for your system are complete by referring to
Section 2. Then, reset the receiver using the following
procedure.

R esetting CLEARS all programmed contents in


memory channels and returns programmed values
in set mode to default values.

q Turn the main power ON with [I/O] on the rear


[Power indicator] [CE] [M-CL] panel.
• The receiver power is still OFF and the [POWER] indi-
cator lights orange.
w While pushing and holding [CE] and [M-CL], push
[POWER] to turn power ON.
• The CPU is reset.
• The CPU start-up takes approx. 5 sec.
• The receiver displays its initial VFO frequencies when
resetting is complete.
[POWER]
e Change the set mode settings after resetting, if de-
sired.

In cooler temperatures, the LCD may appear dark


and unstable after turning power ON. This is normal
and does not indicate any equipment malfunction.

■ Initial settings
After resetting the receiver, set controls as shown in
the figure below.

[NB LEVEL] [NR LEVEL]


: Max. counter clockwise : Max. counter clockwise

[AGC]: 12 o’clock
[SQL]
: Max. counter clockwise

[NOTCH1]/[NOTCH2]
: 12 o’clock
[AF]
: Max. counter clockwise

[RF]: Max. clockwise [TREBLE]/[BASS]: 12 o’clock

3-2
BASIC OPERATIONS 3

■ Selecting VFO mode


 FO is an abbreviation of Variable Frequency Oscilla-
V
tor, and is commonly referred to as a main tuning
function. Frequency, mode and other receiver settings
are stored as a set of VFO data.
The main dial is often called the “VFO knob.”
The IC-R9500 stores ten sets of VFO data. You can
use the desired VFO to call up a frequency and oper-
ating mode for operation.

[VFO]
➥ Push [VFO] to select (last selected) VFO mode.
• O ne of “ VFO-0 ” to “ VFO-9 ” appears when in VFO
mode.

➥ Push the desired VFO number (0 to 9) using the


keypad, then push [VFO] to select the desired VFO
mode.
• O ne of “ VFO-0 ” to “ VFO-9 ” appears when in VFO
mode.

VFO number

“VFO” indicator

■ Selecting memory mode


[M�V] [MEMO] ➥ Push [MEMO] to select memory mode.
• The memory indicator appears when in memory mode.
• P ushing and holding [MuV] for 1 sec. transfers the
contents of the selected memory channel to VFO*.
(p. 7-5)
*Only last selected VFO (VFO-0 to VFO-9) is overwrit-
ten.

Memory indicator Memory channel


number

3-3
3 BASIC OPERATIONS

■ Frequency setting
 here are two ways to set a frequency: with the main
T
dial or keypad. Use both in combination for quick tun-
ing.

• If the panel lock function is activated, the panel


lock indicator lights, and any switches, keys and
controls do not function. In this case, push
[PANEL LOCK] to deactivate the panel lock func-
tion. (see p. 9-2 for details)
• The dial lock function also locks the main dial. To
deactivate the dial lock function, push [LOCK].

D Direct frequency entry with the keypad


 he receiver has a keypad for direct frequency entry
T
as described below.

Keypad [ENT] q Input the desired frequency.


• Push [•] to input “. (decimal point)” between the MHz
units and kHz units.
w Push [ent] to set the input frequency.
• To cancel the input, push [CE] instead of [ent].

[EXAMPLE]
145.000000 MHz
Push

1296.24000 MHz
Push

1296.24000 MHz �1296.36000 MHz


Push

850 kHz (0.85 MHz)


Push

3-4
BASIC OPERATIONS 3

D Tuning with the main dial


 otate the main dial to change the frequency.
R
• The frequency changes in increments determined by
the selected tuning step (see below).

[VFO] Number key q Push the desired VFO number (0 to 9) and [VFO].
• 10 different sets of VFO data can be selected.
w Select the desired operating mode. (p.3-7)
• 10 different sets of VFO data can be selected.
e P ush [▲UP] or [▼DOWN] to select the desired
tuning step.
• Selectable tuning steps can be changed for each oper-
ating mode as shown below.
r Rotate the main dial to set the desired frequency.
TUNING STEP [DOWNZ]/[YUP] Main dial

D Selecting a tuning step


14 preset tuning steps plus 1 programmable tuning
step are available. As a default setting, selectable tun-
ing steps can be programmed, depending on the op-
erating mode. Selectable tuning steps can be
changed in TS select screen.

• Selecting selectable tuning steps

TUNING STEP [DOWNZ]/[YUP] q Push and hold [▲UP] or [▼DOWN] for 1 sec. to
enter the TS select screen to set the selectable
tuning steps for each operating mode.
w Select the desired operating mode. (p.3-7)
e Push [F-1 ▲] or [F-2 ▼] to select the desired tun-
ing step.
• 1 Hz, 10 Hz, 100 Hz, 1 kHz, 2.5 kHz, 5 kHz, 6.25 kHz,
9  kHz, 10 kHz, 12.5 kHz, 20 kHz, 25 kHz, 100 kHz,
1  MHz and programmable are selectable.
[F-1•Y] [F-2•Z] [F-4•DEF] [EXIT/SET] Main dial r Rotate the main dial to set the tuning step as the
selectable tuning step if desired.
• Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default
setting.
t Repeat steps e to r to choose the selectable tun-
ing steps.
y Repeat steps w to r to set the selectable tuning
steps for each operating mode.
u Push [EXIT/SET] (or [▲UP]/[▼DOWN]) to exit the
TS select screen.

Default settings
FM : All ON
WFM : 20 k, 25 k, 100 k, 1 M, ProgTS
AM : 1 k, 5k, 9 k, 10 k, 1 MHz
SSB : 1, 10, 1 k, 1 MHz
CW : 1, 10, 1 k, 1 MHz
FSK : 1, 10, 1 k, 1 MHz
P25 : 1 k, 2.5 k, 5 k, 6.25 k, 10 k,
12.5 k, 20 k, 25 k, 100 k, 1 MHz

3-5
3 BASIC OPERATIONS

• Setting the programmable tuning step

Number key q Push the numeral keys on the keypad that corre-
spond to the tuning step you wish to program.
• Programmable tuning steps can be set between 0.1
and 999.9 kHz in 0.1 kHz steps.
➠ To set programmable tuning steps, enter the desired
steps via the keypad, then push [YUP]or [ZDOWN].
w Push [▲UP] or [▼DOWN] to set the programmable
tuning step.
• Programmable tuning step is automatically selected as
TUNING STEP [DOWNZ]/[YUP] the active tuning step.

D Auto tuning step function


When rotating the main dial rapidly, the tuning speed
accelerates automatically.

q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-


[F5•OTHERS] [F-7•SET]
function screen, if necessary.
w Push [F-7•SET] to select set mode menu screen.
• Pushing and holding [EXIT/SET] for 1 sec. also selects
set mode menu screen.
e Push [F-5•OTHERS] to enter the others set mode.
r Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select “MAIN DIAL Auto
TS.”
t R otate main dial to select the desired condition
from HIGH, LOW or OFF.
[F-1•Y] [F-2•Z] [EXIT/SET]
y Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the set mode.
• HIGN : A pprox. 5 times faster when the tuning
step is set to 1 kHz or smaller steps; ap-
prox. 2 times faster when the tuning step
is set to 5 kHz or larger steps.
• LOW : Approx. 2 times faster
• OFF : Auto tuning step is turned OFF.

D 1⁄4 tuning step function


When operating in CW or FSK, the 1⁄4 tuning function
is available. Dial rotation is reduced to 1⁄4 of normal
speed when the 1⁄4 tuning function is ON for finer tun-
ing control.

➥ Push [1/4] to toggle the 1⁄4 tuning function ON or


OFF.
• “ 1⁄ 4 ” appears when the 1⁄4 tuning function is ON.

[1/4]

3-6
BASIC OPERATIONS 3

■ Operating mode selection


FM, WFM, AM, Synchronous-AM (S-AM(D)/S-AM(U)/
S-AM(L)), SSB (USB/LSB), CW, CW reverse (CW-
R), FSK, FSK reverse (FSK-R) and DIGITAL (P25*)
modes are available in the IC-R9500. Select the de-
sired operation mode as follows. * P25 requires op-
tional UT-122.

To select a mode of operation, push the desired mode


switch momentarily. Push the switch again to toggle
between AM and S-AM(D)/S-AM(U)/S-AM(L), USB
and CW/CW-R, if desired. Push and hold the switch
for 1 sec. to toggle between S-AM(D), S-AM(U) and S-
AM(L), USB and LSB, CW and CW-R, FSK and FSK-
R, if desired.
See the diagram below left for the order of selection.
[FM] [WFM] [AM] [SSB/CW] [FSK] [DIGITAL]

• Selecting FM mode
FM
➥ Push [FM] to select FM.
FM
• Selecting WFM mode
WFM
➥ Push [WFM] to select WFM.
WFM
• Selecting AM mode
AM
➥ Push [AM] to select AM or S-AM.
AM S-AM(D) S-AM(U) • After AM or S-AM is selected, push [AM] to toggle be-
tween AM and S-AM.
S-AM(L) • After S-AM is selected, push and hold [AM] for 1 sec.
to toggle between S-AM(DSB), S-AM(USB) and S-
SSB/CW
AM(LSB).
LSB USB CW CW-R
• Selecting SSB/CW mode
FSK ➥ Push [SSB/CW] to select SSB or CW.
FSK FSK-R • After SSB or CW is selected, push [SSB/CW] to toggle
between SSB (USB is automatically selected) and CW.
DIGITAL
• After SSB or CW is selected, push and hold [SSB/CW]
DIGITAL(P25) for 1 sec. to toggle between USB and LSB, or, CW and
CW reverse mode, respectively.

Push mode switch • Selecting FSK mode


momentarily. ➥ Push [FSK] to select FSK.
FM
• After FSK is selected, push and hold [FSK] for 1 sec. to
Push and hold
toggle between FSK and FSK reverse mode.
mode switch for 1 sec.
• Selecting DIGITAL mode (Requires optional UT-
122)
➥ Push [DIGITAL] to select digital (P25) mode.

3-7
3 BASIC OPERATIONS

■ Volume setting
➥ Rotate [AF] control clockwise to increase, counter-
clockwise to decrease the audio output level.
• Set a suitable audio level.

[AF]
Audio output
increases

Audio output
decreases

■ RF gain adjustment
➥ Rotate [RF] control clockwise to increase, counter-
clockwise to decrease the receiver sensitivity.

 OTE:
N
• When [RF] control is adjusted CCW in FM mode,
audio output decreases then disappears. This is
normal, not a malfunction.
• W hen WFM mode is selected, RF gain is fixed
[RF] MAX regardless of any [RF] control settings.
Sensitivity
increases

Sensitivity
decreases

■ Squelch level adjustment


The squelch disables output from the speaker (closed
position) when no signal is received.

➥ W hen no signal is received, rotate [SQUELCH]


control fully counterclockwise first, then rotate
[SQUELCH] clockwise to the point that the noise
just disappears.
• Push and hold [MONI] to open the squelch temporarily.
[SQUELCH]
Noise squelch
(Recommended level; FM/AM mode only)

S-meter
squelch
Squelch is
open

3-8
BASIC OPERATIONS 3

■ Audio tone adjustment


 OTE: When [TREBLE] or [BASS] control is ad-
N
justed CCW, audio output decreases from [S/P DIF
OUT], [ACC], [LINE OUT] or [REC OUT]. This is
normal, not a malfunction.

D Treble level adjustment


➥ R otate [TREBLE] control clockwise to increase,
counterclockwise to decrease the treble level of the
audio tone.

[TREBLE]
Tone level
increases

Tone level
decreases

D Bass level adjustment


➥ Rotate [BASS] control clockwise to increase, coun-
terclockwise to decrease the bass level of the
audio tone.

[BASS]
Tone level
increases

Tone level
decreases

3-9
3 BASIC OPERATIONS

■ Meter indication selection

D Meter type selection


A total of 4 meter types are available in the IC-
R9500— S-meter, dBµ, dBµ(EMF) and dBm meters.
Follow the instructions below for the meter type selec-
tion.

[F-3•DISPLAY] [F-7•SET] q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to return to normal


screen, if necessary.
w Push [F-7•SET], then push [F-3•DISPLAY] to se-
lect the display set mode.
e Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select “Signal Meter”
item.
r Rotate main dial to select the desired meter type
from “S,” “dBµ,” “dBµ(EMF)” and “dBm.”
t Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the display set mode.
[F-1•Y] [F-2•Z] [EXIT/SET]

• S meter
Signal meter squelch indicator

Appears
• dBµ meter
“p” indicates the signal meter squelch level and
appears while [SQUELCH] control is rotating.

• dBµ[EMF] meter

• dBm meter

3-10
RECEIVE MODES Section 4
■ Operating FM ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 4-2
D Convenient functions for FM ����������������������������������������������������������4-2
■ Duplex operation ������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 4-3
D Offset frequency setting ����������������������������������������������������������������4-3
■ Tone/DTCS squelch operation ��������������������������������������������������������� 4-4
■ Operating WFM �������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 4-5
D Convenient functions for WFM ������������������������������������������������������4-5
■ Operating AM ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 4-6
D Convenient functions for AM ���������������������������������������������������������4-6
■ Operating SSB ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 4-7
D Convenient functions for SSB ��������������������������������������������������������4-7
■ Operating CW ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 4-8
D Convenient functions for CW ���������������������������������������������������������4-8
D APF (Audio Peak Filter) operation �������������������������������������������������4-9
D About CW reverse mode ���������������������������������������������������������������4-9
D About CW pitch control ������������������������������������������������������������������4-9
■ Operating FSK �������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 4-10
D Convenient functions for FSK ������������������������������������������������������4-11
D About FSK reverse mode ������������������������������������������������������������4-11
D Twin peak filter �����������������������������������������������������������������������������4-11
D Setting FSK tone frequency ��������������������������������������������������������4-12
D Functions for the FSK decoder indication �����������������������������������4-13
D Setting the decoder threshold level ���������������������������������������������4-13
D FSK decode set mode �����������������������������������������������������������������4-14
D Setting FSK Baud rate �����������������������������������������������������������������4-16
D Time stamp function ��������������������������������������������������������������������4-16
D Data saving ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������4-17
■ Operating P25 (Requires optional UT-122)������������������������������������� 4-18
D Convenient functions for P25 ������������������������������������������������������4-18
■ Digital squelch operation����������������������������������������������������������������� 4-19
■ TV channel operation (except for USA versions)��������������������������� 4-20
D Convenient functions for TV operation ����������������������������������������4-20

4-1
4 RECEIVE MODES

■ Operating FM
[FILTER] [RX] indicator Keypad q Edit the desired frequency using the keypad.
w Push [FM] to select FM.
• “ F M ” indicator appears.
e Rotate the main dial to tune the desired frequency.
• [RX] indicator lights green and the S-meter indicates
received signal strength when signal is received.
• 10 kHz tuning step is preset for the FM mode.
• Push [FILTER] several times to select the desired filter
width.
r Rotate [AF] to set audio to a comfortable listening
[AF] [FM] Main dial
level.

Appears

D Convenient functions for FM


• Preamp (p. 5-9) • VSC (voice squelch control) (p. 8-3)
➥ Push [P.AMP] several times to set the preamp ➥ Push [VSC] to turn the VSC function ON or OFF.
OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON. Only ON/ • The VSC indicator appears when the voice squelch
OFF is available above 30 MHz. function is set to ON.
• “P.AMP1” or “P.AMP2” appears when the preamp 1
or preamp 2 is ON below 30 MHz. “P.AMP ON” • AFC (Auto Frequency Control) (p. 5-17)
appears above 30 MHz. ➥ Push [AFC] to turn the AFC function ON or OFF.
• The AFC indicator appears when the AFC function
• Attenuator (p. 5-9) is set to ON.
➥ Push [ATT] several times to set the attenuator in
6 dB steps for HF bands, or 10 dB step for
30–1150 MHz. Only 20 dB is available for 1150–
3335 MHz.
• “ATT” and attenuation level appear when the attenu-
ator is ON.

• Auto notch filter (p. 5-16)


➥ Push [ANF] switch to turn the auto notch func-
tion ON or OFF.
• Notch indicator (above [ANF] switch) lights when
either the auto notch is ON.

4-2
RECEIVE MODES 4

■ Duplex operation
Duplex operation uses two different frequencies for
transmitting and receiving. Generally, duplex is used
in communication through a repeater, some utility
communications, etc.

 uring repeater operation, the transmit station fre-


D
quency is shifted from the receive station frequency
by the offset frequency. Repeater information (offset
frequency and shift direction) can be programmed
into memory channels.

q Edit the desired receive frequency (repeater output


frequency) using the keypad.
w Push [FM] to select FM.
• “ F M ” indicator appears.
e Push [DUP] several times to select the duplex di-
rection.
• “ DUP– ” or “ DUP+ ” appears on the LCD.
r Push and hold [DUP] for 1 sec. to enter the offset
[FM] [DUP] [EXIT/SET] [MONI] Main dial
frequency setting screen, then rotate the main dial
to set the desired offset frequency or edit the de-
sired offset frequency directly with the keypad.
Appears t Push and hold [MONI] to monitor the transmit sta-
tion frequency (repeater input frequency) directly.
y To return to simplex, push [DUP] once or twice.

D Offset frequency setting


Keypad q Push and hold [DUP] for 1 sec. to enter offset fre-
quency set mode.
w Rotate the main dial to select the desired offset
frequency or edit the desired offset frequency di-
rectly with the keypad.
e Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the previous indica-
tion.

[DUP] [EXIT/SET] Main dial

4-3
4 RECEIVE MODES

■ Tone /DTCS squelch operation


The tone or DTCS squelch opens only when receiv-
ing a signal containing a matching subaudible tone or
DTCS code. You can silently wait for calls from group
members using the same tone.

[F-1•Y] [F-2•Z] [F-4•DEF] q Set the desired frequency and select FM mode.
w P ush [TONE] several times to turn the tone or
DTCS squelch function ON.
• “ TSQL ” appears when the tone squelch function is ON.
• “DTCS ” appears when the DTCS squelch function is
ON.
e Push and hold [TONE] for 1 sec. to enter tone fre-
quency set mode.
r Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the items, “T-SQL
[TONE] [FM] [EXIT/SET] [MONI] Main dial TONE” or “DTCS CODE.”
t Rotate the main dial to select the desired tone fre-
quency or DTCS code.
• Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default
setting.
y Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the previous indica-
tion.
u When the received signal includes a matching tone
(or DTCS code), squelch opens and the signal can
be heard.
• When the received signal’s tone (or DTCS code) does
not match, tone (DTCS) squelch does not open, how-
ever, the S-indicator shows signal strength.
i To open the squelch manually, push [MONI].
• The squelch opens temporarily while pushing and hold-
ing [MONI].
o To cancel the tone squelch or DTCS squelch, push
[TONE] several times to clear the tone or DTCS
squelch.
• “ TSQL ” or “DTCS ” disappears.

• Available tone frequencies (unit: Hz)


67.0 085.4 107.2 136.5 165.5 186.2 210.7 254.1
69.3 088.5 110.9 141.3 167.9 189.9 218.1 150.0
71.9 091.5 114.8 146.2 171.3 192.8 225.7
74.4 094.8 118.8 151.4 173.8 196.6 229.1
77.0 097.4 123.0 156.7 177.3 199.5 233.6
79.7 100.0 127.3 159.8 179.9 203.5 241.8
82.5 103.5 131.8 162.2 183.5 206.5 250.3

• Available DTCS codes


023 072 152 244 311 412 466 631
025 073 155 245 315 413 503 632
026 074 156 246 325 423 506 654
031 114 162 251 331 431 516 662
032 115 165 252 332 432 523 664
036 116 172 255 343 445 526 703
043 122 174 261 346 446 532 712
047 125 205 263 351 452 546 723
051 131 212 265 356 454 565 731
053 132 223 266 364 455 606 732
054 134 225 271 365 462 612 734
065 143 226 274 371 464 624 743
071 145 243 306 411 465 627 754

4-4
RECEIVE MODES 4

■ Operating WFM
q Edit the desired frequency using the keypad.
[RX] indicator Keypad
w Push [WFM] to select WFM.
• “ W F M ” indicator appears.
e Rotate the main dial to tune the desired frequency.
• [RX] indicator lights green and the S-meter indicates
received signal strength when signal is received.
• 25 kHz tuning step is preset for the WFM mode.
r Rotate [AF] to set audio to a comfortable listening
level.
[AF] [WFM] Main dial

Appears

D Convenient functions for WFM


• Preamp (p. 5-9) • VSC (voice squelch control) (p. 8-3)
➥ Push [P.AMP] several times to set the preamp ➥ Push [VSC] to turn the VSC function ON or OFF.
OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON. Only ON/ • The VSC indicator appears when the voice squelch
OFF is available above 30 MHz. function is set to ON.
• “P.AMP1” or “P.AMP2” appears when the preamp 1
or preamp 2 is ON below 30 MHz. “P.AMP ON” • AFC (Auto Frequency Control) (p. 5-17)
appears above 30 MHz. ➥ Push [AFC] to turn the AFC function ON or OFF.
• The AFC indicator appears when the AFC function
• Attenuator (p. 5-9) is set to ON.
➥ Push [ATT] several times to set the attenuator in
6 dB steps for HF bands, or 10 dB step for
30–1150 MHz. Only 20 dB is available for 1150–
3335 MHz.
• “ATT” and attenuation level appear when the attenu-
ator is ON.

• Auto notch filter (p. 5-16)


➥ Push [ANF] switch to turn the auto notch func-
tion ON or OFF.
• Notch indicator (above [ANF] switch) lights when
either the auto notch is ON.

4-5
4 RECEIVE MODES

■ Operating AM
[RX] indicator Keypad q Edit the desired frequency using the keypad.
w Push [AM] to select AM.
• “ A M ” indicator appears.
• After AM mode is selected, push and hold [AM] for 1
sec. to toggle between AM and S-AM modes.
e Rotate the main dial to tune the desired frequency.
• [RX] indicator lights green and the S-meter indicates
received signal strength when signal is received.
r Rotate [AF] to set audio to a comfortable listening
[AF] [AM] Main dial level.

Appears

D Convenient functions for AM


• Preamp (p. 5-9) • Twin PBT (passband tuning) (p. 5-11)
➥ Push [P.AMP] several times to set the preamp ➥ Rotate [TWIN PBT] controls (inner/outer).
OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON. Only ON/ • Push [PBT CLEAR] to clear the settings.
OFF is available above 30 MHz.
• “P.AMP1” or “P.AMP2” appears when the preamp 1 • Auto notch filter (p. 5-16)
or preamp 2 is ON below 30 MHz. “P.AMP ON” ➥ Push [ANF] switch to turn the auto notch func-
appears above 30 MHz. tion ON or OFF.
• Notch indicator (above [ANF] switch) lights when the
• Attenuator (p. 5-9) auto notch is ON.
➥ Push [ATT] several times to set the attenuator in
6 dB steps for HF bands, or 10 dB step for • Manual notch filter (p. 5-16)
30–1150 MHz. Only 20 dB is available for 1150– ➥ Push [NOTCH1] or [NOTCH2] switch to turn the
3335 MHz. manual notch function ON or OFF.
• “ATT” and attenuation level appear when the attenu- • Rotate [NOTCH] control to set the notch frequency.
ator is ON. • Notch indicator (above [NOTCH1] or [NOTCH2]
switch) lights when either the manual notch is ON.
• Noise blanker (p. 5-15)
➥ Push [NB] switch to turn the noise blanker ON • AGC (auto gain control) (p. 5-10)
and OFF, and then rotate [NB] control to adjust ➥ Push [AGC] switch several times to select
the threshold level. AGC FAST, AGC MID or AGC SLOW.
• Noise blanker indicator (above [NB] switch) lights ➥ Push [AGC VR] to turn the AGC time constant
when the noise blanker is ON. manual setting ON or OFF.
• Push [NB] for 1 sec. to enter noise blanker set mode. • Rotate [AGC] control to adjust the time constant.

• Noise reduction (p. 5-16) • Auto tuning function (p. 5-17)


➥ Push [NR] switch to turn the noise reduction ON ➥ Push [AUTOTUNE] to turn the auto tuning func-
and OFF. tion ON or OFF.
• Rotate [NR] control to adjust the noise reduction • The receiver automatically tunes the desired signal
level. within ±5 kHz range.
• Noise reduction indicator (above [NR] switch) lights IMPORTANT!
when the noise reduction is ON. When receiving a weak signal, or receiving a signal
with interference, the automatic tuning function may
not tune, or may tune to an undesired signal.

4-6
RECEIVE MODES 4

■ Operating SSB
[RX] indicator Keypad q Edit the desired frequency using the keypad.
w Push [SSB/CW] to select SSB.
• USB is automatically selected.
• After SSB mode is selected, push and hold [SSB/CW]
for 1 sec. to toggle between USB and LSB modes.
• “ U S B ” or “ L S B ” appears.
e Rotate the main dial to tune a desired signal.
• [RX] indicator lights green and the S-meter indicates
received signal strength when signal is received.
[AF] [SSB/CW] Main dial r Rotate [AF] to set audio to a comfortable listening
level.
Appears

D Convenient functions for SSB


• Preamp (p. 5-9) • Auto notch filter (p. 5-16)
➥ Push [P.AMP] several times to set the preamp ➥ Push [ANF] switch to turn the auto notch func-
OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON. Only ON/ tion ON or OFF.
OFF is available above 30 MHz. • Notch indicator (above [ANF] switch) lights when the
• “P.AMP1” or “P.AMP2” appears when the preamp 1 auto notch is ON.
or preamp 2 is ON below 30 MHz. “P.AMP ON”
appears above 30 MHz. • Manual notch filter (p. 5-16)
➥ Push [NOTCH1] or [NOTCH2] switch to turn the
• Attenuator (p. 5-9) manual notch function ON or OFF.
➥ Push [ATT] several times to set the attenuator in • Rotate [NOTCH] control to set the attenuating fre-
6 dB steps for HF bands, or 10 dB step for quency.
30–1150 MHz. Only 20 dB is available for 1150– • Notch indicator (above [NOTCH1] or [NOTCH2]
3335 MHz. switch) lights when either the manual notch is ON.
• “ATT” and attenuation level appear when the attenu-
ator is ON.
• AGC (auto gain control) (p. 5-10)
➥ Push [AGC] switch several times to select
• Noise blanker (p. 5-15) AGC FAST, AGC MID or AGC SLOW.
➥ Push [NB] switch several times to select the ➥ Push [AGC VR] to turn the AGC time constant
noise blanker 1 ON, noise blanker 2 ON and manual setting ON or OFF.
noise blanker OFF, and then rotate [NB] control • Rotate [AGC] control to adjust the time constant.
to adjust the threshold level.
• Noise blanker indicator (above [NB] switch) lights
• VSC (voice squelch control) (p. 8-3)
when the noise blanker is ON. ➥ Push [VSC] to turn the VSC function ON or OFF.
• Push [NB] for 1 sec. to enter noise blanker set mode. • The VSC indicator appears when the voice squelch
function is set to ON.
• Twin PBT (passband tuning) (p. 5-11)
➥ Rotate [TWIN PBT] controls. • Auto tuning function (p. 5-17)
• Push [PBT CLEAR] to clear the settings. ➥ Push [AUTOTUNE] to turn the auto tuning func-
tion ON or OFF.
• Noise reduction (p. 5-16) • The receiver automatically tunes the desired signal
➥ Push [NR] switch to turn the noise reduction ON within ±1 kHz range.
and OFF. IMPORTANT!
• Rotate [NR] control to adjust the noise reduction When receiving a weak signal, or receiving a signal
level. with interference, the automatic tuning function may
• Noise reduction indicator (above [NR] switch) lights not tune, or may tune to an undesired signal.
when the noise reduction is ON.

4-7
4 RECEIVE MODES

■ Operating CW
[RX] indicator Keypad q Edit the desired frequency using the keypad.
w Push [SSB/CW] to select CW.
• After CW mode is selected, push and hold [SSB/CW]
for 1 sec. to toggle between CW and CW-R modes.
• “ C W ” or “ CW-R ” appears.
e Rotate the main dial to tune a desired signal.
• Try to match the specified signal’s tone to the side tone
frequency.
• [RX] indicator lights green and the S-meter indicates
[AF] [SSB/CW] Main dial received signal strength when signal is received.
r Rotate [AF] to set audio to a comfortable listening
level.
Appears

D Convenient functions for CW


• Preamp (p. 5-9) • Twin PBT (passband tuning) (p. 5-11)
➥ Push [P.AMP] several times to set the preamp ➥ Rotate [TWIN PBT] controls (inner/outer).
OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON. Only ON/ • Push [PBT CLEAR] to clear the settings.
OFF is available above 30 MHz.
• “P.AMP1” or “P.AMP2” appears when the preamp 1 • Manual notch filter (p. 5-16)
or preamp 2 is ON below 30 MHz. “P.AMP ON” ➥ Push [NOTCH1] or [NOTCH2] switch to turn the
appears above 30 MHz. manual notch function ON or OFF.
• Rotate [NOTCH] control to set the notch frequency.
• Attenuator (p. 5-9) • Notch indicator (above [NOTCH1] or [NOTCH2]
➥ Push [ATT] several times to set the attenuator in switch) lights when either the manual notch is ON.
6 dB steps for HF bands, or 10 dB step for
30–1150 MHz. Only 20 dB is available for 1150– • AGC (auto gain control) (p. 5-10)
3335 MHz. ➥ Push [AGC] switch several times to select
• “ATT” and attenuation level appear when the attenu- AGC FAST, AGC MID or AGC SLOW.
ator is ON. ➥ Push [AGC VR] to turn the AGC time constant
manual setting ON or OFF.
• Noise blanker (p. 5-15) • Rotate [AGC] control to adjust the time constant.
➥ Push [NB] switch to turn the noise blanker ON
and OFF, and then rotate [NB] control to adjust • 1⁄4 function (p. 3-6)
the threshold level. ➥ Push [1/4] to turn the 1⁄4 function ON or OFF.
• Noise blanker indicator (above [NB] switch) lights
• Auto tuning function (p. 5-17)
when the noise blanker is ON.
• Push [NB] for 1 sec. to enter noise blanker set mode. ➥ Push [AUTOTUNE] to turn the auto tuning func-
tion ON or OFF.
• Noise reduction (p. 5-16) • The receiver automatically tunes the desired signal
➥ Push [NR] switch to turn the noise reduction ON within a ±500 Hz range.
and OFF. IMPORTANT!
• Rotate [NR] control to adjust the noise reduction When receiving a weak signal, or receiving a signal
level. with interference, the automatic tuning function may
• Noise reduction indicator (above [NR] switch) lights not tune properly, or tune onto an undesired signal.
when the noise reduction is ON.

4-8
RECEIVE MODES 4

D APF (Audio Peak Filter) operation


 he APF changes the audio frequency response by
T
boosting a particular frequency to enhance a desired
CW signal.

The audio filter shape is also selectable from “SOFT”


and “SHARP” in the others set mode. (p. 11-13)

q D uring CW mode, push [APF/TPF] to turn the


audio peak filter ON and OFF.
• “APF ” appears in the display and [APF/TPF] indicator
above this switch lights green.
w Push and hold [APF/TPF] for 1 sec. several times
[APF/TPF]
to select the desired audio filter width.
• 320, 160 and 80 Hz filters are available.

D About CW reverse mode


 W-R (CW Reverse) mode uses the opposite side
C
band to receive CW signals.
Push Use when interfering signals are near a desired signal
and you want to use CW-R to reduce the interference.
BFO BFO ➥ During CW mode, push and hold [SSB/CW] for 1
Interference Desired signal Interference Desired signal sec. to select CW and CW-R mode.
CW mode (LSB side) CW-R mode (USB side)

D About CW pitch control


The received CW audio pitch can be adjusted to suit
your preference (from 300 to 900 Hz in 5 Hz steps).
This does not change the operating frequency.

q During CW mode, push [PITCH] to turn the CW


pitch setting screen ON and OFF.
w Rotate the main dial to suit your preference.
• Adjustable within 300 to 900 Hz in 5 Hz steps.
[PITCH] [F-4•DEF] Main dial
• Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to return to the de-
fault setting.

CW Pitch 800
Sets the desired CW pitch within 300 to 900 Hz in
5 Hz steps. (default: 800 Hz)

4-9
4 RECEIVE MODES

■ Operating FSK
A DSP-based high-quality Baudot FSK decoder is
built-in to the IC-R9500.

If you would rather use your FSK terminal or TNC,


consult the manual that comes with the FSK terminal
or TNC.

[RX] indicator Keypad q Edit the desired frequency using the keypad.
w Push [FSK] to select FSK.
• After FSK mode is selected, push and hold [FSK] for
1 sec. to toggle between FSK and FSK-R modes.
• “ F S K ” or “ FSK-R ” appears.
e Push [F-3•DECODE] to display the decoder
screen.
• The IC-R9500 has a built-in Baudot decoder.
r To tune the desired signal, aim for a symmetrical
[F-3•DECODE] [FSK] Main dial wave form and ensure the signal peaks align with
the mark and shift frequency lines in the FFT
scope.
Appears • [RX] indicator lights green and the S-meter indicates
received signal strength when signal is received.

RX contents screen
FFT scope

Water-fall

4-10
RECEIVE MODES 4

D Convenient functions for FSK

• Preamp (p. 5-9) • Noise reduction (p. 5-16)


➥ Push [P.AMP] several times to set the preamp ➥ Push [NR] switch to turn the noise reduction ON
OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON. Only ON/ and OFF.
OFF is available above 30 MHz. • Rotate [NR] control to adjust the noise reduction
• “P.AMP1” or “P.AMP2” appears when the preamp 1 level.
or preamp 2 is ON below 30 MHz. “P.AMP ON” • Noise reduction indicator (above [NR] switch) lights
appears above 30 MHz. when the noise reduction is ON.

• Attenuator (p. 5-9) • Manual notch filter (p. 5-16)


➥ Push [ATT] several times to set the attenuator in ➥ Push [NOTCH1] or [NOTCH2] switch to turn the
6 dB steps for HF bands, or 10 dB step for manual notch function ON or OFF.
30–1150 MHz. Only 20 dB is available for 1150– • Rotate [NOTCH] control to set the notch frequency.
3335 MHz. • Notch indicator (above [NOTCH1] or [NOTCH2]
• “ATT” and attenuation level appear when the attenu- switch) lights when either the manual notch is ON.
ator is ON.
• AGC (auto gain control) (p. 5-10)
• Noise blanker (p. 5-15) ➥ Push [AGC] switch several times to select
➥ Push [NB] switch to turn the noise blanker ON AGC FAST, AGC MID or AGC SLOW.
and OFF, and then rotate [NB] control to adjust ➥ Push [AGC VR] to turn the AGC time constant
the threshold level. manual setting ON or OFF.
• Noise blanker indicator (above [NB] switch) lights • Rotate [AGC] control to adjust the time constant.
when the noise blanker is ON.
• Push [NB] for 1 sec. to enter noise blanker set mode. • 1⁄4 function (p. 3-6)
➥ Push [1/4] to turn the 1⁄4 function ON or OFF.
• Twin PBT (passband tuning) (p. 5-11)
➥ Rotate [TWIN PBT] controls (inner/outer).
• Push [PBT CLEAR] to clear the settings.

D About FSK reverse mode


FSK FSK-R  eceived characters are occasionally garbled when
R
the received signal has Mark and Space tones re-
TONE SHIFT SHIFT TONE
versed. This reversal can be caused by incorrect TNC
connections, setting, commands, etc. To receive re-
f1 f2 f1 f2 versed FSK signals correctly, select FSK-R mode.
BFO BFO
➥ During FSK mode, push and hold [FSK] for 1 sec.
to select FSK and FSK-R mode.

D Twin peak filter


The twin peak filter changes audio frequency re-
sponse by boosting the mark and space frequencies
(2125 and 2295 Hz) for better reception of FSK sig-
nals.

➥ During FSK mode, push [APF/TPF] to turn the twin


peak filter ON and OFF.
• “ TPF ” appears in the LCD and the [APF/TPF] indica-
[APF/TPF] tor above this switch lights green while the filter is in
use.

 OTE: When the twin peak filter is in use, the re-


N
ceived audio output may increase. This is normal,
not a malfunction.

4-11
4 RECEIVE MODES

D Setting FSK tone frequency


 elect the FSK tone frequency and adjust the FSK shift
S
width.

q Select the FSK decoder screen as described on


page 4-13.
w Push [TONE] on the multifunction menu to enter
FSK tone set mode.
e Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the items, “FSK
Tone Frequency” or “FSK Shift Width.”
r Rotate the main dial to select the desired tone fre-
quency or shift width.
• Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default
setting.
t Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the previous indication.

FSK RX Frequency Mark/Space Center


Selects the FSK receive frequency from Mark/Space • Mark/Space Center: Displayed frequency is set to
Center and Mark(Space). the center of Mark and Space. (q)
(default: Mark/Space Center) • Mark(Space): Displayed frequecy is set as higher
frequency (f2). (w)

FSK FSK-R
TONE SHIFT SHIFT TONE

q w q w
f1 f2 f1 f2
BFO BFO

FSK Tone Frequency 1615


Selects the FSK mark frequency. FSK mark frequency
is switched between 1275, 1615 and 2125 Hz.
(default: 1615 Hz)

FSK Shift Width 170


Selects the FSK shift width. There are 3 selectable
values: 170, 200 and 425 Hz. (default: 170 Hz)

4-12
RECEIVE MODES 4

D Functions for the FSK decoder indication


[F-2•HOLD/CLR] [F-7•WIDE] q Push [FSK] to select FSK.
• After FSK mode is selected, push and hold [FSK] for
1 sec. to toggle between FSK and FSK-R modes.
• “ F S K ” or “ FSK-R ” appears.
w Push [F-3•DECODE] to display the decoder screen.
• When tuned into an FSK signal, decoded characters
are displayed in the contents screen.
e Push [F-2•HOLD/CLR] to freeze the current screen.
• “ HOLD ” appears while the function is in use.
• Push [F-2•HOLD/CLR] again to release the function.
[FSK] [EXIT/SET]
r Push and hold [F-2•HOLD/CLR] for 1 sec. to clear
the displayed characters.
• “ HOLD ” indicator disappears at the same time when the
hold function is in use.
t Push [F-7•WIDE] to toggle the FSK decode screen
size from normal and wide.
y Push [EXIT/SET] to close the FSK decode screen.

• Wide screen indication

D Setting the decoder threshold level


 djust the FSK decoder threshold level if some char-
A
acters are displayed when no signal is received.

q S elect the FSK decoder screen as described


above.
w Push [F-5•ADJ] to select the threshold level setting
condition.
e R otate the main dial to adjust the FSK decoder
threshold level.
• Push and [F-6•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default set-
ting.
r Push [F-5•ADJ] to exit from the threshold level set-
ting condition.

 he UnShift On Space (USOS) function and new


T
line code can be set in the FSK set mode. (p. 4-14)

4-13
4 RECEIVE MODES

D FSK decode set mode


This set mode is used to set the decode USOS func-
tion, time stamp setting, etc.

• Setting contents
[F-1•Y] [F-2•Z] [F-3•� �] [F-7•WIDE]
q During FSK mode operation, push [F-3•DECODE]
to select FSK decode screen.
w Push [F-1•MENU1] to select FSK decode menu
2, then push [F-6•SET] to select FSK decode set
mode.
• Push [F-7•WIDE] to toggle the screen size from normal
and wide.
e Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired set
item.
r Set the desired condition using the main dial.
[F-4•DEF] [EXIT/SET] Main dial
• Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select a default
• FSK decode set mode screen condition or value.
• P ush [F-3•t u] to select the set contents for some
items.
t Push [EXIT/SET] to exit from set mode.

FSK FFT Scope Averaging OFF


Sets the FFT scope waveform averaging function Recommendation!
from 2 to 4 and OFF. (default: OFF) If you use the FFT scope waveform for tuning, use of
the default, or smaller number setting is recom-
mended.

FSK FFT Scope Waveform Color 51 153 255


Sets the color for the FFT scope waveform.
• The color is set in RGB format. • Push [F-3•t u] to select R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue),
• The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale. and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from 0 to 255.

FSK Decode USOS ON


Turns letter code decoding after receiving a “space” • ON : Decode as letter code.
(USOS; UnShift On Space function) capability ON • OFF : Decode as character code.
and OFF.

FSK Decode New Line Code CR,LF,CR+LF


Selects the new line code of the internal FSK de- • CR,LF,CR+LF : Makes new line with any codes.
coder. • CR+LF : Makes new line with CR+LF code
CR: Carriage Return, LF: Line Feed only.

4-14
RECEIVE MODES 4

D FSK decode set mode (continued)


FSK Time Stamp (Time) Local
Selects the clock indication for time stamp usage. • Local : Selects the time that set in “Time (Now).”
• UTC* : Selects the time that set in “CLOCK2.”
NOTE: The time will be displayed when [F-4•TIME] is
*T he name of choice may differ according to
pushed in “FSK DECODE” screen as at page “CLOCK2 Name” setting (p, 10-2). “UTC” is the
4-13. default name of CLOCK2.

FSK Time Stamp (Frequency) ON


Selects the operating frequency indication for time • ON : Displays the operating frequency. (default)
stamp usage. • OFF : No operating frequency displays.

FSK Font Color (Receive) 128 255 128


Sets the text color for received characters. • P ush [F-3•t u to select R (Red), G (Green) and B
• The color is set in RGB format. (Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from
• The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale. 0 to 255.

FSK Font Color (Time Stamp) 0 155 189


Sets the text color for time stamp indication. • P ush [F-3•t u] to select R (Red), G (Green) and B
• The color is set in RGB format. (Blue), and then rotate the main dial to set the ratio from
• The set color is indicated in the box beside the RGB scale. 0 to 255.

4-15
4 RECEIVE MODES

D Setting FSK baud rate


 he data transfer rate can be selected from two
T
speeds, 45 bps and 50 bps.

q Select the FSK decoder screen as described on


page 4-13.
w P ush [F-1•MENU1] to select the second FSK
decode menu.
e Push [F-2•BAUD] to select the desired data trans-
fer rate.
• 45 bps and 50 bps are available.

[F-1•MENU1] [F-2•BAUD]

50 bps Selected baud rate appears

D Time stamp function


 ime stamp function is used to add the time or fre-
T
quency information when receiving a signal. Fre-
quency information can be turned OFF in FSK de-
code set mode.

q Select the FSK decoder screen as described on


page 4-13.
w Push [F-4•TIME] to add the time stamp informa-
tion.
• Frequency , date and time information are added on
the decoder screen.
e Continue receiving.
[F-4•TIME]

Frequency Date Time

4-16
RECEIVE MODES 4

D Data saving
The contents of the received signal can be saved in
the CF memory card.

[F-5•OPTION] [F-6•SAVE] [F-7•WIDE] q In the FSK decode screen, push [F-1•<MENU1>]
to select the second FSK decode menu.
w Push [F-5•SAVE] to select decode file save screen.
e Change the following conditions if desired.
• File name:
z Push [F-4•EDIT] to select file name edit con-
dition.
• Push [F-1• DIR/FILE] several times to select the
file name, if necessary.
[F-1•DIR/FILE] [F-4•EDIT] [EXIT/SET] Main dial x Push [ABC], [123] or [Symbol] to select the
character group, then rotate the main dial to
• Decode file save screen select the character.
• Push [123] or [Symbol] to toggle numerals and
symbols.
• [ABC] : A to Z (capital letters); [123]: 0 to 9 (nu-
merals); [Symbol]: ! # $ % & ‘ ` ^ – ( ) { } _ ~ @
can be selected.
• Push [F-1•t] to move the cursor left, push [F-2•u]
to move the cursor right, [F-3•DEL] delete a char-
• Decode file save screen— file name edit acter and push [F-4•SPACE] to insert a space.
c Push [EXIT/SET] to set the file name.
• File format
z P ush [F-5•OPTION] to enter save option
screen.
x Rotate the main dial to select the save format
from Text or HTML.
• Save option screen • “Text” is the default setting.
• Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the
default setting.
c Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the previous in-
dication.
• Saving location
z P ush [F-1•DIR/FILE] to select tree view
screen.
x Select the desired directory or folder in the
When USB-Memory is Inserted:
CF memory card.
Push and hold [F-1•DIR/FILE] for 1 sec. to select
• Push [F-4•t u] to select the upper directory.
the USB-Memory, or push and hold [F-1•DIR/FILE]
• Push [F-2•Y] or [F-3•Z] to select folder in the
for 1 sec. again to return to CF memory card when same directory.
selecting the saving location. • Push and hold [F-4•t u] for 1 sec. to select a
folder in the directory.
• Push [F-5•REN/DEL] to rename the folder.
• Push and hold [F-5•REN/DEL] for 1 sec. to de-
lete the folder.
• Push and hold [F-6•MAKE] for 1 sec. to making a
new folder. (Edit the name in the same manner
as the “• File name” above.)
c Push [F-1•DIR/FILE] twice to select the file
name.
r Push [F-6•SAVE].
• After the save is completed, returns to FSK decode
menu 2 automatically.
✔ For your convenience!
Two formats, Text and HTML, are available for stor-
age of data to your PC.

4-17
4 RECEIVE MODES

■ Operating P25 (Requires optional UT-122)


[RX] indicator Keypad q Edit the desired frequency using the keypad.
w Push [DIGITAL] to select P25.
• “ P 2 5 ” indicator appears.
e Rotate the main dial to tune the desired frequency.
• [RX] indicator lights green and the S-meter indicates
received signal strength when signal is received.
r Rotate [AF] to set audio to a comfortable listening
level.

[AF] [DIGITAL] Main dial

Appears

D Convenient functions for P25


• Preamp (p. 5-9) • Twin PBT (passband tuning) (p. 5-11)
➥ Push [P.AMP] several times to set the preamp ➥ Rotate [TWIN PBT] controls (inner/outer).
OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON. Only ON/ • Push [PBT CLEAR] to clear the settings.
OFF is available above 30 MHz.
• “P.AMP1” or “P.AMP2” appears when the preamp 1
or preamp 2 is ON below 30 MHz. “P.AMP ON”
appears above 30 MHz.

• Attenuator (p. 5-9)
➥ Push [ATT] several times to set the attenuator in
6 dB steps for HF bands, or 10 dB step for
30–1150 MHz. Only 20 dB is available for 1150–
3335 MHz.
• “ATT” and attenuation level appear when the attenu-
ator is ON.

4-18
RECEIVE MODES 4

■ Digital squelch operation


While in P25 mode operation, 2 types of digital
squelch, NAC or Selective, are available.

[F-1•Y] [F-2•Z] [F-5•EDIT] q Set the desired frequency and select P25 mode.
w Push [D.SQL] to turn the digital squelch function
ON.
• “ NAC ” or “ SEL ” appears when the digital squelch
function is ON.
e Push and hold [D.SQL] for 1 sec. to enter P25 dig-
ital squelch set mode.
r Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the items, “NAC,”
“TGID” or “Unit ID.”
[D.SQL] [DIGITAL] [EXIT/SET] [MONI] Main dial t Push [F-5•EDIT] to enter digital code programming.
• A cursor appears and blinks.
• Push [F-1•t] or [F-2•u] for cursor movement.
• Push [F-3•DEL] to delete the selected code.
• Using the receiver’s keypad, [0]–[9], can also enter nu-
merals.
• Multifunction switch guide changes to the additional
keys, [A]–[F], for hexadecimal input.
y Push [F-5•SET] to input and set the code.
• The cursor disappears.
u Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the previous indica-
tion.
i W hen the received signal includes a matching
code, squelch opens and the signal can be heard.
• When the received signal’s code does not match, dig-
ital squelch does not open, however, the S-indicator
shows signal strength.
o To open the digital squelch manually, push [MONI].
• The digital squelch opens temporarily while pushing
and holding [MONI].
!0 To cancel digital squelch, push [D.SQL] several
times to clear the digital squelch.
• “ NAC ” or “ SEL ” disappears.
• Digital squelch set mode

4-19
4 RECEIVE MODES

■ TV channel operation (except for USA versions)


A TV tuner is built-in to the IC-R9500, and connects
to the [VIDEO IN] and [VIDEO OUT] on the rear panel
using a TV jumper cable to monitor the TV programs
(except for USA version).

If you would rather use your TV tuner, connect the ex-


ternal tuner to [VIDEO IN] on the rear panel.

q Push [DISPLAY] once or twice to turn ON the de-


sired video screen.
• P ush once to turn ON the mini video screen, push
again to turn ON the full video screen and push again
to close the video screen.
w Set the desired frequency and select WFM mode.
• If you connect the external tuner, this setting is not nec-
essary.
[DISPLAY] [WFM] e Push [DISPLAY] to close the video screen.

 he video display settings can be adjusted in dis-


T
play set (Video) mode. (p. 11-24)

D Convenient functions for TV operation


• Preamp (p. 5-9) • VSC (voice squelch control) (p. 8-3)
➥ Push [P.AMP] several times to set the preamp ➥ Push [VSC] to turn the VSC function ON or OFF.
OFF, preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON. Only ON/ • The VSC indicator appears when the voice squelch
OFF is available above 30 MHz. function is set to ON.
• “P.AMP1” or “P.AMP2” appears when the preamp 1
or preamp 2 is ON below 30 MHz. “P.AMP ON” • AFC (Auto Frequency Control) (p. 5-17)
appears above 30 MHz. ➥ Push [AFC] to turn the AFC function ON or OFF.
• The AFC indicator appears when the AFC function
• Attenuator (p. 5-9) is set to ON.
➥ Push [ATT] several times to set the attenuator in
6 dB steps for HF bands, or 10 dB step for
30–1150 MHz. Only 20 dB is available for 1150–
3335 MHz.
• “ATT” and attenuation level appear when the attenu-
ator is ON.

• Auto notch filter (p. 5-16)


➥ Push [ANF] switch to turn the auto notch func-
tion ON or OFF.
• Notch indicator (above [ANF] switch) lights when
either the auto notch is ON.

4-20
RECEIVE FUNCTIONS Section 5
■ Spectrum scope screen �������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-2
D Center mode ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-2
D Fix mode ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-3
D Peak marker function �������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-4
D Wide band-pass filter selection������������������������������������������������������ 5-5
D Wide band scope function������������������������������������������������������������� 5-5
D Mini scope screen indication �������������������������������������������������������� 5-6
D Scope set mode ��������������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-6
■ Preamplifier �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-9
■ Attenuator ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-9
■ AGC function ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-10
D Selecting the preset value �����������������������������������������������������������5-10
D Adjusting the AGC time constant ������������������������������������������������5-10
D Setting the AGC time constant preset value �������������������������������5-10
■ Twin PBT operation ������������������������������������������������������������������������ 5-11
■ IF filter selection ����������������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-12
D IF filter selection ������������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-12
D Filter passband width setting ������������������������������������������������������ 5-12
D Roofing filter selection ���������������������������������������������������������������� 5-13
D DSP filter shape ������������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-13
D Filter shape set mode ����������������������������������������������������������������� 5-13
■ Noise blanker ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-15
D NB set mode ������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-15
■ Noise reduction ������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-16
■ Notch function ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-16
■ Autotune function ���������������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-17
■ AFC function ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 5-17

5-1
5 RECEIVE FUNCTIONS

■ Spectrum scope screen


This DSP-based spectrum scope allows you to dis-
play the conditions on the selected band, as well as
relative strengths of signals. The IC-R9500 has two
modes for the spectrum indication— one is center
mode, and anther one is fixed mode.

In addition, the IC-R9500 has a mini-scope screen to


save screen space.

D Center mode
Displays signals around the set frequency within the
selected span. The set frequency is always displayed
at the center of the screen.

Multifunction switch [F-2] [F-6] q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary.
w Push [F-1•SCOPE] to select the scope screen.
• T he spectrum scope shows the peak level holding
function. Peak levels are displayed in the background of
the current spectrum in a different color until the re-
ceive frequency changes. This can be deactivated and
the waveform color can be set in scope set mode.
(p. 5-7)
e Push [F-6•CENT/FIX] to select the center mode.
[F-1] [F-3] [F-5] [EXIT/SET]
• “ CENTER ” is displayed when center mode is selected.
MENU1 SPAN BW/SPEED ATT HOLD CENT/FIX PEAK
r Push [F-2•SPAN] once.
• Multifunction switch guide changes to the span setting
MENU2 W-BPF SET guide.
[F-1] [F-2] [F-3] [F-4] [F-5] [F-6] [F-7] t Push [SPAN+] or [SPAN–] several times to select
the scope span.
• ±2.5 k, ±5.0 k, ±10 k, ±25 k, ±50 k, ±100 k, ±250 k,
±500  k, ±1  M, ±2.5 M and ±5 MHz are available.
y Push [F-3•BW/SPEED] once.
• Multifunction switch guide changes to the resolution
band width/speed setting guide.
u Push [BW+] or [BW–] several times to select the
resolution band width.
• 0.2 k, 0.5 k, 1 k, 2 k, 5 k, 10 k and 20 kHz are available.
i Push [SPEED–] or [SPEED+] several times to se-
lect the sweep speed.
o Push [F-4•ATT] several times to activate an attenu-
ator or turn the attenuator OFF.
• 10, 20 and 30 dB attenuators are available.
!0 Push [F-5•HOLD] to freeze the current spectrum
waveform.
• Observed indication example • “ HOLD ” ap­pears while the function is in use.
• The peak hold function can be deactivated in scope set
mode.
!1 Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the scope screen.

 OTE: If a strong signal is received, a ghost wave-


N
form may appear. Push [F-4•ATT] several times to
activate the spectrum scope attenuator in this case.
S purious signal waveforms may be displayed if
generated in the internal scope circuit and do not
indicate a receiver malfunction.

5-2
RECEIVE FUNCTIONS 5

D Fixed frequency mode


Displays signals within the specified frequency range.
The selected frequency band conditions can be ob-
served at a glance when using this mode.

Multifunction switch [F-2] [F-6] q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary.
w Push [F-1•SCOPE] to select the scope screen.
• The spectrum scope shows the peak level holding
function. Peak levels are displayed in the background
of the current spectrum in a different color until the
receive frequency changes. This can be deactivated
and the waveform color can be set in scope set mode.
(p. 5-7)
[F-1] [F-3] [F-5] [EXIT/SET] e Push [F-6•CENT/FIX] to select the fixed mode.
• “ FIX ” is displayed when fix mode is selected.
MENU1 EDGE BW/SPEED ATT HOLD CENT/FIX PEAK r Push [F-2•EDGE] once.
• Multifunction switch guide changes to the resolution
MENU2 W-BPF SET
band width/speed setting guide.
[F-1] [F-2] [F-3] [F-4] [F-5] [F-6] [F-7] t P ush [START] then edit the desired frequency
using the keypad to set the lower frequency edge,
and push [STOP] then edit the desired frequency
using the keypad to set the higher frequency edge.
y Push [F-3•BW/SPEED] once.
• Multifunction switch guide changes to the resolution
band width/speed setting guide.
u Push [BW+] or [BW–] several times to select the
resolution band width.
• 0.2 k, 0.5 k, 1 k, 2 k, 5 k, 10 k and 20 kHz are available
depends on the frequency range.
i Push [SPEED–] or [SPEED+] several times to se-
lect the sweeping speed.
o Push [F-4•ATT] several times to activate an attenu-
ator or turn the attenuator OFF.
• 10, 20 and 30 dB attenuators are available.
!0 Push [F-5•HOLD] to freeze the current spectrum
waveform.
• “ HOLD ” ap­pears while the function is in use.
• The peak hold function can be deactivated in scope set
mode.
!1 Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the scope screen.

 OTE: If a strong signal is received, a ghost wave-


N
form may appear. Push [F-4•ATT] several times to
activate the spectrum scope attenuator in this case.

5-3
5 RECEIVE FUNCTIONS

D Peak marker function


The peak marker function can display the frequencies
of several peaks in order.

q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-


function screen, if necessary.
w Push [F-1•SCOPE] to select the scope screen.
• The spectrum scope shows the peak level holding
function. Peak levels are displayed in the background
of the current spectrum in a different color until the
receive frequency changes. This can be deactivated
and the waveform color can be set in scope set mode.
Multifunction switch [EXIT/SET] [F-7¥PEAK] (p. 5-7)
e P ush [F-6•CENT/FIX] to select center or fixed
mode.
r Push [F-7•PEAK] once.
• Multifunction switch guide changes to the peak selec-
tion guide.
t Push [PEAK] to place the marker on the first peak.
• Push [NEXT level] to search for the next peak level.
• P ush [NEXTt] to search for the next peak level of
lower frequency.
• P ush [NEXTu] to search for the next peak level of
higher frequency.
• Push and hold [➔RX] to overwrite the peak level fre-
quency as the new center frequency.
• Push [OFF] to turn OFF the maker.
• “<<” or “>>” appears when the marker is out of range.
y Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the previous screen.
Peak indicator Peak frequency

5-4
RECEIVE FUNCTIONS 5

D Wide band-pass filter selection


The wide band-pass filter function can change the RF
band pass filter and the select the wide band-pass fil-
ter

q D u r i n g s p e c t r u m s c o p e d i s p l ay O N , p u s h
[F-1•MENU1] to select the second scope menu.
w Push [F-2•W-BPF] once or twice to select the wide
band-pass filter setting ON, AUTO or OFF.
• “W-BPF ” appears when ON is selected, “ W-BPF AUTO ”
appears when AUTO is selected or no indication ap-
pears when OFF is selected.
• While W-BPF auto is activate, the wide band pass filter
[F-1] [F-2] [EXIT/SET] is automatically selected when wider than 500 kHz
span is selected.
e Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the previous screen.

 OTE: The RF filter circuit is commonly used for


N
the scope signal and received signal. When W-BPF
is selected, or W-BPF auto is selected with wider
than 500 kHz span, interference may heard due to
the received signal passing through the high pass
filter instead of the specified band-pass filters.

D Wide band scope function


The wide band scope function is available to sweep a
wide frequency range (max. ±500 MHz). While this
function is active, AF monitor is not available.

Multifunction switch q D u r i n g s p e c t r u m s c o p e d i s p l ay O N , p u s h
[F-2•SPAN] to select the span setting condition.
• Multifunction switch guide changes to the span selec-
tion guide.
w Push [WIDE] to select the wide band scope func-
tion ON or OFF.
• When ON is selected, audio disappears.
e Push [SPAN+] or [SPAN–] several times to select
the scope span.
[F-1] [F-2] [EXIT/SET] • ±5.0 M, ±10 M, ±25 M, ±50 M, ±100 M, ±250 M and
±500  M are available.
r Push [EXIT/SET] to return to the previous screen.

5-5
5 FUNCTIONS FOR RECEIVE

D Mini scope screen indication


The mini scope screen can be displayed with another
screen display, such as set mode menu, decoder
screen, memory list screen, etc. simultaneously.

q Set the scope mode (center or fixed), marker, at-


tenuator, span, etc. in advance. (pgs. 5-2, 5-3)
w Push [M.SCOPE] to toggle the mini scope indica-
tion ON and OFF.

[M.SCOPE]

D Scope set mode


This set mode is used to set the waveform color,
center frequency indication for center mode, etc.
[F-1•Y] [F-2•Z] [F-3•� �] [F-7•WIDE] q D u r i n g s p e c t r u m s c o p e d i s p l ay O N , p u s h
[F-1•MENU1] to select the second scope menu.
w Push [F-7•SET] to enter scope set mode screen.
• Push [F-7•WIDE] to toggle the screen size between
normal and wide.
e Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired set
item.
r Set the desired condition using the main dial.
• Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default
[F-4•DEF] [EXIT/SET] Main dial condition or value.
• P ush [F-3•t u] to select the set contents for some
items.
t Push [EXIT/SET] to exit from set mode.

5-6
RECEIVE FUNCTIONS 5

D Scope set mode (continued)


Max Hold ON
Turn the peak level holding function ON or OFF.

CENTER Type Display Filter Center


Select the center frequency of the spectrum scope • Filter center : Shows the selected filter’s center
indication (center mode only). frequency at the center.
• Carrier Point Center
: S hows the selected operating
mode carrier point frequency at
the center.
• Carrier Point Center (Abs. Freq.)
: In addition to the carrier point
center setting above, the actual
frequency is displayed at the bot-
tom of the scope.

Waveform Color (Current) 161 185 221


Set the waveform color for the currently received sig- • The color is set in RGB format.
nals. • Push [F-3•t u] to select R (Red), G (Green) and B
(Blue), and rotate the ratio from 0 to 255 range.
• T he set color is indicated in the box beside the
RGB scale.

Waveform Color (Max Hold) 130 66 176


Set the waveform color for the receiving signals max- • The color is set in RGB format.
imum level. • Push [F-3•t u] to select R (Red), G (Green) and B
(Blue), and rotate the ratio from 0 to 255 range.
• T he set color is indicated in the box beside the
RGB scale.

Marker Color (RX) 255 150 50


Set the marker color for the displayed frequency • The color is set in RGB format.
while the fix mode. • Push [F-3•t u] to select R (Red), G (Green) and B
(Blue), and rotate the ratio from 0 to 255 range.
• T he set color is indicated in the box beside the
RGB scale.

Marker Color (Peak) 255 0 0


Set the marker color for the peak frequency of the • The color is set in RGB format.
receiving signals. • Push [F-3•t u] to select R (Red), G (Green) and B
(Blue), and rotate the ratio from 0 to 255 range.
• T he set color is indicated in the box beside the
RGB scale.

5-7
5 RECEIVE FUNCTIONS

D Scope set mode (continued)


Peak Excursion 6dB
Set the next peak excursion level from 0 to 80 dB in
1 dB steps. (default: 6 dB)

If the difference between the signal peak and adja-


cent minimum values is less than the set level, it will
not be found as the next peak level when [NEXTt]
or [NEXTu] is pushed.

Peak Threshold –90dB


Set the next peak threshold level from 0 to –100 dB
in 1 dB steps. (default: –90dB)

If the difference between the signal and last peak


signal values is more than the set level, it will not be
found as the next peak level when [NEXTt] or
[NEXTu] is pushed.

5-8
RECEIVE FUNCTIONS 5

■ Preamplifier
The preamp amplifies received signals in the receiver
front end, to improve the S/N ratio and sensitivity. Set
this to preamp 1 or preamp 2 when receiving weak
signals.

[P.AMP] ➥ Push [P.AMP] several times to set the preamp OFF,


preamp 1 ON or preamp 2 ON.
• Below 30 MHz • Above 30 MHz
For all O nly ON/OFF
HF bands is available
 For all
HF bands

✔ About the “P.AMP2”


The “P.AMP 2” is a high gain receive amplifier. When
the “P.AMP 2” is used when strong signal are present,
distortion sometimes results. If this occurs, use the re-
ceiver with the “P.AMP 1” or “P.AMP OFF” setting.

The “P.AMP 2” is most effective when:


• Used on bands above 24 MHz and when signals are
weak.
During 1150–3335 MHz (ANT2) operation, either • Receive sensitivity is insufficient during low gain, or
the preamplifier or attenuator is activate exclusively. while using a narrow band antenna (such as small
loop, a Beverage antenna or a short Yagi antenna).

■ Attenuator
The attenuator prevents a desired signal from being
distorted by a very strong signals are near the desired
frequency or when very strong electric fields, such as
from broadcasting stations, are near your location.

[ATT] ➥ Push [ATT] several times to select the desired at-


tenuator or attenuator OFF.
• During HF bands operation, 6, 12, 18, 24, 30 dB are
available.
• During 30–1150 MHz operation, 10, 20, 30 dB are available.
• During 1150–3335 MHz operation, only 20 dB is availa-
ble.
➥ Push and hold [ATT] for 1 sec. to turn OFF the at-
tenuator, when it’s ON.
• HF bands • 30–1150 MHz
6 dB 10 dB
attenuation attenuation
12 dB 20 dB
attenuation attenuation
18 dB 30 dB
attenuation attenuation
24 dB
attenuation • 1150–3335 MHz
20 dB
30 dB
attenuation
attenuation

5-9
5 RECEIVE FUNCTIONS

■ AGC function
[AGC VR] indicator [AGC] control The AGC (auto gain control) controls receiver gain to
produce a constant audio output level even when the
received signal strength varies greatly.

The receiver has 3 preset AGC characteristics (time


constant: fast, mid, slow) for non-FM, WFM or P25
mode.

 he FM, WFM or P25 mode AGC time constant is


T
[AGC VR/OFF] [AGC]
fixed as ‘FAST’ (0.1 sec.) and AGC time constant
cannot be selected.

D Selecting the preset value


q Select non-FM, WFM or P25 mode.
w P ush [AGC] several times to select AGC fast
(FAST), AGC medium (MID) or AGC slow (SLOW).
• P ush and hold [AGC VR/OFF] for 1 sec. to turn the
AGC function OFF.

D Adjusting the AGC time constant


q Select non-FM, WFM or P25 mode.
w Push [AGC VR/OFF] once or twice to select AGC
volume (VR), then rotate [AGC] control to adjust
the AGC time constant.
• [AGC VR] indicator lights green and “VR” appears in-
stead of “FAST,” “MID” or “SLOW.”

D Setting the AGC time constant preset value


q S elect the desired mode (not FM, WFM or P25
mode).
w Push and hold [AGC] for 1 sec. to enter AGC set
mode.
e Push [AGC] several times to select FAST time con-
stant.
r Rotate the main dial to set the desired time con-
• Selectable AGC time constant (unit: sec.) stant for ‘AGC FAST.’
Mode Default Selectable AGC time constant • AGC time constant can be set between 0.1 to 8.0 sec.
FM 0.1 (FAST) Fixed (depends on mode) or turned O
­ FF.
• Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select a default
WFM 0.1 (FAST) Fixed value.
3.0 (FAST) t Push [AGC] to select medium time constant.
0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.0,
AM 5.0 (MID) y Rotate the main dial to set the desired time con-
4.0, 5.0, 6.0, 7.0, 8.0 stant for ‘AGC MID.’
7.0 (SLOW)
• AGC time constant can be set between 0.1 to 8.0 sec.
0.3 (FAST) (depends on mode) or turned O ­ FF.
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0,
SSB 2.0 (MID) • Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select a default value.
2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0
6.0 (SLOW) u Push [AGC] to select slow time constant.
0.1 (FAST) i Rotate the main dial to set the desired time con-
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, stant for ‘AGC SLOW.’
CW 0.5 (MID)
2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0 • AGC time constant can be set between 0.1 to 8.0 sec.
1.2 (SLOW)
(depends on mode) or turned O­ FF.
0.1 (FAST) • P ush and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select a default
0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.5, 0.8, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0,
FSK 0.5 (MID) value.
2.5, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0
1.2 (SLOW) o Select another mode (not FM, WFM or P25). Re-
P25 0.1 (FAST) Fixed peat steps e to i if desired.
!0 Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the AGC set mode screen.
5-10
RECEIVE FUNCTIONS 5

■ Twin PBT operation


[TWIN PBT] for lower [TWIN PBT] for higher To reject interference, PBT (Passband Tuning) elec-
tronically narrows the IF passband width by shifting
the IF frequency slightly outside of the IF filter pass-
band. The IC-R9500 uses DSP for the PBT function.
Moving both [TWIN-PBT] controls shifts the IF pass-
band center frequency both above and below the re-
ceived frequency.

➥ T he LCD graphically shows the passband width


[PBT CLEAR] and shift frequency.
➥ Push and hold [FILTER] for 1 sec. to enter the filter
Shows filter width, shifting value and condition set screen. Current passband width and shift fre-
quency is displayed in the filter set screen.
➥ P ush and hold [PBT CLR] for 1 sec. to set the
[TWIN PBT] controls to the center positions.

 he PBT is adjustable in 50 Hz steps in the SSB/CW/


T
FSK modes, and 200 Hz in the AM mode.
In this time, the shift value changes in 25 Hz steps in
the SSB/CW/FSK modes, and 100 Hz in the AM
mode.
• Filter set screen • [TWIN PBT] should normally be set to the center posi-
tions (PBT setting is cleared) when there is no interfer-
ence.
• When PBT is used, the audio tone may be changed.
• Not available for FM, WFM or P25 mode.
• W hile rotating [TWIN PBT], noise may occur. This
comes from the DSP unit and does not indicate an
equipment malfunction.

• About passband width and shift value on the screen


IF center frequency
Passband’s center frequency
SFT: Shift value

BW: Passband width


PBT1
PBT2

• PBT operation example


Both controls at Reducing a lower Reducing both higher and
center position passband lower passbands
(PBT1) (PBT2) (PBT1) (PBT2) (PBT1) (PBT2)

or

Passband Passband

IF center frequency Interference Desired signal Interference Desired signal Interference

5-11
5 RECEIVE FUNCTIONS

■ IF filter selection
[FIL] The receiver has 3 passband width IF filters for each
mode.
For FM mode, the passband width is fixed and 3
passband widths are available.
For WFM and P25 mode, the passband width is fixed.
For AM mode, the passband width can be set within
200 Hz to 10 kHz in 200 Hz steps. A total of 50 pass-
band widths are available.
For SSB and CW modes, the passband width can be
set within 50 to 3600 Hz in 50 or 100 Hz steps. A total
of 41 passband widths are available.
For FSK mode, the passband width can be set within
50 to 2700 Hz in 50 or 100 Hz steps. A total of 32
passband widths are available.

 he filter selection is automatically memorized in


T
each mode.
The PBT shift frequencies are automatically memo-
rized for each filter.

D IF filter selection


q Select the desired mode.
w Push [FILTER] several times to select the IF filter 1,
2 or 3.
• The selected passband width and filter number is dis-
played in the LCD.

D Filter passband width setting (except FM, WFM or P25 mode)


q Push and hold [FILTER] for 1 sec. to enter filter set
screen.
w Select any mode except FM, WFM or P25 mode.
• Passband widths for FM modes are fixed and cannot be set.
e Push [FILTER] several times to select the desired
IF filter.
r While pushing [F-1•BW], rotate the main dial to set
the desired passband width.
• In AM mode, the passband width can be set within the
following range.
200 Hz to 10 kHz 200 Hz steps
• In SSB and CW modes, the passband width can be set
within the following range.
50 to 500 Hz 50 Hz steps
600 to 3600 Hz 100 Hz steps
• In FSK mode, the passband width can be set within the
following range.
50 to 500 Hz 50 Hz steps
600 to 2700 Hz 100 Hz steps
• Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default value.
t Repeat steps w to r if desired.
y Push [EXIT/SET] to exit filter set screen.
 he PBT shift frequencies are cleared when the
T
passband width is changed.

 his filter set screen graphically displays the


T
PBT shift frequencies and operations.
5-12
RECEIVE FUNCTIONS 5

D Roofing filter selection


The IC-R9500 has 3, 6 15 and 50 kHz roofing filters
at the 1st IF frequency. The roofing filter provides in-
terference reduction from nearby strong signals.

q Push and hold [FILTER] for 1 sec. to enter filter set


screen.
w Select any mode except FM, WFM or P25 mode.
e P ush [F-6•ROOFING] to select the desired filter
width from 50 kHz, 15 kHz (default), 6 kHz and
3 kHz.
• Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select a default
value.
r Push [EXIT•SET] to exit filter set screen.

D DSP filter shape


The type of DSP filter shape for each SSB, SSB data
and CW can be selected independently from soft and
sharp.

q Push and hold [FILTER] for 1 sec. to enter filter set


screen.
w Select SSB, SSB data or CW mode.
e Push [F-7•SHAPE] to select the desired filter shape
from soft and sharp.
r Push [EXIT•SET] to exit filter set screen.

The filter shape can be set for each band (HF and
50 MHz bands), mode, and passband width (CW
only) independently as your default setting in filter
shape set mode.

D Filter shape set mode


The type of DSP filter shape for each SSB and CW
can be selected independently from soft and sharp.

q Push and hold [FILTER] for 1 sec. to enter filter set


screen.
w Push and hold [F-7•SHAPE] for 1 sec. to enter filter
shape set mode.
e Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired item.
r Rotate the main dial to select the filter shape from
soft and sharp.
t Push [EXIT/SET] to exit filter shape set mode.

HF SSB (600Hz – ) SOFT


Select the filter shape for SSB mode in HF bands.  he set filter shape is automatically used only
T
when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider.

CW ( – 500Hz) SHARP
Select the filter shape for CW mode in HF bands.  he set filter shape is automatically used only
T
when the IF filter is set to 500 Hz or narrower.

5-13
5 RECEIVE FUNCTIONS

D Filter shape set mode (continued)

CW (600Hz – ) SHARP
Select the filter shape for CW mode in HF bands.  he set filter shape is automatically used only
T
when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider.

V/U SSB (600Hz – ) SOFT


Select the filter shape for SSB mode in VHF/UHF  he set filter shape is automatically used only
T
bands. when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider.

CW ( – 500Hz) SHARP
Select the filter shape for CW mode in VHF/UHF  he set filter shape is automatically used only
T
bands. when the IF filter is set to 500 Hz or narrower.

CW (600Hz – ) SHARP
Select the filter shape for CW mode in VHF/UHF  he set filter shape is automatically used only
T
bands. when the IF filter is set to 600 Hz or wider.

5-14
RECEIVE FUNCTIONS 5

■ Noise blanker
The noise blanker eliminates pulse-type noise such
as the noise from car ignitions. The noise blanker is
not available for FM, WFM or P25 mode.

[NB] q Push [NB] several times to select the noise blanker


function, NB1 or NB2, and OFF.
• [NB] indicator above this switch lights green.
• “NB1 ” or “ NB2 ” appears on the display when either is
ON.
w R otate [NB] control to adjust the noise blanker
threshold level.

 hen using the noise blanker, received signals


W
may be distorted if they are excessively strong or
[NB] control the noise type is other than pulsing. Turn the noise
blanker OFF, or rotate [NB] control to a shallow po-
sition in this case.

D NB set mode


To deal with various type of noises, attenuation level
and noise width can be set in NB set mode. Two of
noise blanker, NB1 and NB2, can be set independ-
ently.

q Turn ON the desired noise blanker, NB1 or NB2.


• When entering NB1 set mode, this step can be skipped.
w P ush and hold [NB] for 1 sec. to enter NB1 (or
NB2) set mode.
e Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired item.
r R otate the main dial to set the desired level or
value.
• Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select a default
value.
t Push [EXIT/SET] to exit NB1 (or NB2) set mode.

• NB1 set mode


NB1 Depth 8
Set the noise attenuation level from 1 to 10.

NB1 Width 40%


Set the noise pulse width from 1 to 100.

• NB2 set mode


NB2 Depth 8
Set the noise attenuation level from 1 to 10.

NB2 Width 80%


Set the noise pulse width from 1 to 100.

5-15
5 RECEIVE FUNCTIONS

■ Noise reduction
The noise reduction function reduces random noise
components and enhances desired signals which are
buried in noise. The DSP performs the random noise
reduction function.
[NR] q Push the [NR] to turn the noise reduction ON.
• [NR] indicator above this switch lights green.
w Rotate the [NR] control to adjust the noise reduction
level.
e Push the [NR] switch to turn the noise reduction
OFF.
• [NR] indicator lights off.

 etting the [NR] control too high can result in audio


S
[NR] control signal masking or distortion. Set the [NR] control for
maximum readability.

■ Notch function
[ANF] [NOTCH1] [NOTCH2] This receiver has auto and manual notch functions.
The auto notch function uses DSP to automatically at-
tenuates up to 3 beat tones, tuning signals, etc., even
if they are moving. The manual notch can be set to
attenuate a frequency via the [NOTCH1]/[NOTCH2]
controls.
The auto notch can be used in SSB, AM, FM and WFM
modes.
The manual notch can be used in SSB, CW, FSK and
[NOTCH1] control [NOTCH2] control AM modes.

• Auto notch indication


➥ Push [ANF] to turn the auto notch function ON and
OFF in FM, WFM, AM and SSB modes.
• [ANF] indicator above this switch lights green.
• “ AN ” appears when auto notch is in use.

• Manual notch indication


➥ Push [NOTCH1] or [NOTCH2] to turn the manual
notch function ON and OFF, manual and OFF in
AM, SSB, CW and FSK modes.
• [NOTCH1]/[NOTCH2] indicators above these switches
light green.
• “ MN1 ” or “ MN2 ” appear when manual notch is in use.
• Push and hold [NOTCH1] or [NOTCH2] for 1 sec. to se-
lect the notch filter width for manual notch from wide,
middle and narrow.
• Set to attenuate a frequency for manual notch via the
[NOTCH1] or [NOTCH2] controls.

 hile tuning the manual notch, noise may be heard.


W
This comes from the DSP unit and does not indicate
an equipment malfunction.

5-16
RECEIVE FUNCTIONS 5

■ Autotune function
The Automatic tuning function tunes the displayed fre-
quency (max. AM: ±5 kHz, SSB: ±1 kHz, CW: 500 Hz)
automatically when an off frequency signal is re-
ceived. This function is active while in AM, SSB or
CW is selected.

➥ Push [AUTOTUNE] (AFC) to toggle the autotune


function ON or OFF.
• “AUTO TUNE ” blinks when autotune function is acti-
vate.
• After 30 sec. has passed, the autotune function stops
tuning automatically even it’s still off frequency.

[AFC•AUTOTUNE]

Appears

■ AFC function
The AFC stands for Automatic Frequency Control.
The AFC function tunes the displayed frequency au-
tomatically when an off-center frequency is received.
It activates in FM or WFM mode only.

➥ Push [AFC] to toggle the AFC function ON or OFF.


• “ AFC ” appears when AFC function is active.

 he AFC limit can be set in the others set mode.


T
While the AFC limit is ON, AFC stops tuning when
the received frequency leaves the out of the fre-
quency limit range.
[AFC•AUTOTUNE]

Appears

5-17
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS Section 6
■ About digital voice recording ������������������������������������������������������������ 6-2
■ Recording received audio������������������������������������������������������������������ 6-3
D Regular recording ������������������������������������������������������������������������� 6-3
■ Playing the recorded audio ��������������������������������������������������������������� 6-4
D Regular playing ����������������������������������������������������������������������������� 6-4
■ Erasing the recorded contents ��������������������������������������������������������� 6-4
■ Selecting the CF memory card or USB-Memory ����������������������������� 6-4
■ Short recording ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 6-5
D Recording ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 6-5
D Playing back ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 6-5
■ Voice set mode ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 6-6

6-1
6 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

■ About digital voice recording


The IC-R9500 has two types of digital voice record-
ers. One is a regular voice recorder for which a con-
tinuous long recording is available.
And the other is a short recorder which temporarily
stores the previous period. A maximum message
length of 30 sec. can be recorded into a RAM.

• Example— Regular recording

Push for 1 sec. Push for 1 sec.


(starts recording) (stops recording)
NOTE: The recording time period differ depends on the recording
sound quality and memory capacity.

• Example— Short recording

Push momentarily Push momentarily


(starts recording) (starts recording)

NOTE: The contents will be overwritten, and previous recorded


contents are erased.

15 sec. 3 sec. When [REC] is pushed momentarily again within 15 sec.*


(default) from the last [REC] operation, all the contents between
[REC] operations will be recorded.
Push [REC] momentarily
records the contents of
the previous 15 sec.* *The recording time period can be changed with “Short Rec Time” in voice set mode (p. 6-6).

• Playing back for regular recording

Push to start playing back. Push to stop.

• Playing back the all contents for short recording • Playing back the end of 5 sec.* for short recording

Push for 1 sec. Push momentarily.

30 sec. (max.) Not playing back Play back (5 sec.; default)


*The playing back time period can be changed with
“Short Play Time” in voice set mode (p. 6-6).

6-2
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS 6

■ Recording received audio


This voice recorder records not only the received
audio, but also information such as operating fre-
quency, mode, and the recording time for your future
reference.

D Regular recording
q P ush [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary.
w Select the desired mode.
e P ush [F-2•VOICE] to call up the voice recorder
screen.
• Push and hold [F-6•CF/USB] for 1 sec. once or twice to
select the CF card or USB-Memory, when USB mem-
ory is Inserted.
[F-2•VOICE] [REC] [EXIT/SET]
• T he recording sound quality can be set in voice set
mode. (p. 6-6)
Appear r Push and hold [REC] for 1 sec. to start recording.
• The operating frequency, mode and current date/time
are programmed as the memory names automatically.
• “ ● REC ” indicators appear on the voice recorder
screen and display’s right edge, and the timer counts
up.
t Push and hold [REC] for 1 sec. to stop recording.
y Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the voice recorder screen.

If you do not change any recording setting, you can


start or stop recording from any screen, just push
and hold [REC] for 1 sec.

Counts up

6-3
6 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

■ Playing the recorded audio

D Regular playing
q P ush [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary.
w P ush [F-2•VOICE] to call up the voice recorder
screen.
• Push and hold [F-6•CF/USB] for 1 sec. once or twice to
select the CF card or USB-Memory, when USB mem-
ory is Inserted.
e Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired voice
[F-1•Y] [F-2•Z] [F-3•PLAY] memory to playback.
Appear r Push [F-3•PLAY] to start playback.
• “ ≈PLAY ” indicators appear on the voice recorder
screen and display’s right edge, and the timer counts
down.
• Push [F-1•<<<] when you want to rewind for 15 sec.
• Push [F-2•<<] when you want to rewind for 5 sec.
• Push [F-3•>>] when you want to fast forward for 5 sec.
• Push [F-4•>>>] when you want to fast forward for 15
sec.
• Push and hold above keys to continue rewinding or fast
forwarding, respectively.
• P ush [F-5•PAUSE] when you want to pause playing
back.
t Push [F-6•STOP] to stop playback, if desired.
• Playback is terminated automatically when all of the re-
Counts down corded contents in the channel are played.
y Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the voice recorder screen.

■ Erasing the recorded contents


The recorded contents can be erased independently
by channel.

q Call up the voice recorder screen.


• Push and hold [F-6•CF/USB] for 1 sec. once or twice to
select the CF card or USB-Memory, when USB mem-
ory is Inserted.
w Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired voice
memory to be erased.
e P ush and hold [F-4•DEL] for 1 sec. to erase the
contents.
[F-1•Y] [F-2•Z] [F-4•DEL]
r Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the voice recorder screen.

■ Select the CF memory card or USB-Memory


The voice recorder can record into CF memory card
or USB-Memory, when USB-Memory is inserted.

q Call up the voice recorder screen.


w Push and hold [F-6•CF/USB] for 1 sec. to select the
desired CF card or USB-Memory.
e Operate the voice recorder as desired.
r Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the voice recorder screen.

[F-6•CF/USB]
6-4
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS 6

■ Short recording
To record the receiving signal contents temporarily
and immediately, short recording is available. This
short recording function records the 15 sec. (max.) of
audio prior to when [REC] is pushed into RAM. Con-
tent is only saved when the receiver’s power is ON
and lost when power is removed.
This short recording is useful when you miss hearing
important information from the receiver, you can listen
to the important information once more. This function
can be used while you are recording into CF memory
card or USB-Memory as regular recording.

D Recording
➥ P ush [REC] momentarily to save the previous
15 sec. audio.
• No indication appears.
• T he recordable time period can be set in voice set
mode. (p. 6-6)

[REC]

D Playing back
• Short time play
➥ P ush [PLAY] momentarily to play back the last
5 sec. of the short recording audio.
• “ ≈PLAY ” indicator appears on the display’s right edge.
• Playback is terminated automatically when all of the re-
corded contents, or after 5 sec.
• The playback time period can be set in voice set mode.
(p. 6-6)
[PLAY]

• Full time play


➥ Push and hold [PLAY] for 1 sec. to play back the
short recording audio for full time.
• “ ≈PLAY ” indicator appears on the display’s right edge.
• Playback is terminated automatically when all of the re-
corded contents are played.

6-5
6 VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS

■ Voice set mode


Sets the automatic monitor function, short play and
normal recording times for voice recorder.

q P ush [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-


function screen, if necessary.
w P ush [F-2•VOICE] to call up the voice recorder
screen.
e Push [F-7•SET] to enter the voice set mode screen.
r Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired item.
t R otate main dial to set the desired condition or
[F-1•Y] [F-2•Z] [F-4•DEF] [F-7•SET] [EXIT/SET] Main dial value.
• Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default
condition or value.
y Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the voice set mode screen.

Short Play Time 5s


Set the desired time period for the short play back • 3 to 10 sec. in 1 sec. steps can be set.
(when [PLAY] is pushed momentarily). (default: 5 sec.)

Short Rec Time 15s


Set the desired time period for one-touch recording • 5 to 30 sec. in 1 sec. steps can be set.
(when [REC] is pushed momentarily). (default: 15 sec.)

Sound Quality (Sampling Rate) HQ1(16kHz)


Set the recording sound quality. The sampling rate • S Q1 (8kHz), SQ2 (12kHz), HQ1 (16KHz), HQ2
setting is expressed in samples per second, and de- (24kHz), SHQ (48kHz) can be set.
termines the sound quality. (default: HQ1(16kHz))
Although a higher sampling rate provides a better
quality sound than a lower sampling rate, the file size
becomes larger.

Rec Remote OFF


Turns the recording control signal ON or OFF. (de- • OFF : Continues recording even when received
fault: OFF) signal disappears or squelch closes. (de-
fault)
• ON : Records only when received signal ap-
pears or squelch opens and stops re-
cording when received signal disappears
or squelch closes.

6-6
VOICE RECORDER FUNCTIONS 6

■ Voice set mode (continued)


Speech Mix All
Selects the recording the speech audio from “All,” • All : Records the speech audio when speech
“Operation” and “OFF.” operation is performed from the front
panel or scan stops if “REC SPEECH”
setting is ON in the others set mode
(p. 11-11).
• Operation : Records the speech audio when speech
operation is performed from the front
panel.
• OFF : No recording of the speech audio.

Speech Mix Level 50%


Sets the recording speech audio level from 0 to 100% • 0% : Mutes the speech audio.
in 1% steps. (default: 50%) •


• 50% : Same level as receive audio. (default)



• 100% : Mutes the receive audio.

6-7
MEMORY OPERATION Section 7
■ Memory channels ����������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7-2
■ Memory channel selection ���������������������������������������������������������������� 7-3
D Using the [M-CH]/[BANK] selectors ���������������������������������������������� 7-3
D Using the keypad �������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7-3
■ Memory channel programming ��������������������������������������������������������� 7-4
D Programming in VFO mode ���������������������������������������������������������� 7-4
D Programming in memory mode ���������������������������������������������������� 7-4
■ Frequency transferring ���������������������������������������������������������������������� 7-5
D Transferring in VFO mode ������������������������������������������������������������� 7-5
D Transferring in memory mode ������������������������������������������������������� 7-5
■ Memory names ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7-6
D Editing (programming) memory names ���������������������������������������� 7-6
■ Memory clearing ������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7-6
■ Memory list screen ��������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7-7
D Selecting a memory channel using the memory list screen �������� 7-7
D Confirming programmed memory channels ��������������������������������� 7-7
D Memory bank set �������������������������������������������������������������������������� 7-8
D Editing memory channel ��������������������������������������������������������������� 7-9

7-1
7 MEMORY OPERATION

■ Memory channels
The receiver has 1220 memory channels. Memory
mode is very useful for quickly changing to often-used
frequencies.

All 1220 memory channels are tuneable which means


the programmed frequency can be tuned temporarily
with the main dial, etc. in memory mode.memory
channel.

MEMORY
MEMORY TRANSFER OVER-
CHANNEL CAPABILITY CLEAR
CHANNEL NUMBER TO VFO WRITING

Regular memory 0–999 For normal use. Frequency, mode, tuning YES YES YES
channels (0–999) step, name, P.AMP/ATT information and etc.
can be programmed.
Auto write mem- A00–A99 Frequencies detected during auto memory YES YES YES
ory channels (1000–1099) write scan are memorized into this bank in
sequence. Mode and tuning step are written
at the same time. Note that when “Auto MW
Scan Memory Clear” in scan set mode is set
as “ON” and auto write scan is started, all
memories in this bank are cleared.
Skip memory S00–S99 Undesired signals such as from beacons, YES YES YES
channels (1100–1199) control-coded signals, etc., can be pro-
grammed to be skipped during programmed
scan and auto memory write scan. When
[MW] is pushed and held for 1 sec. while
scan is paused, the displayed frequency is
programmed into this bank regardless of the
selected bank.
Scan edge mem- P0A–P9B Memorize scan edge frequencies. 10 pairs of YES YES YES
ory channels (1200–1219) scan edges (P0A to P9B) are programmable
(upper and lower scan edges). Mode and tun-
ing step are automatically equalized to the
last programmed channel in a pair.

7-2
MEMORY OPERATION 7

■ Memory channel selection


D Using the [M-CH]/[BANK] selectors
q Push [MEMO] to select memory mode.
w Rotate [BANK] to select the desired memory bank.
e Rotate [M-ch] to select the desired memory chan-
nel.
r To return to VFO mode, push [VFO].
• Last operated VFO appears.
• Or push numeral key (0–9) and [VFO] to return to the
desired VFO.
[MEMO] [BANK] [M-CH]

✔ Bank limit function


While rotating the [M-CH] selector, memory channels
are selectable in the current bank only (Bank limit ON);
or selectable from all banks (Bank limit OFF).

➥ Push and hold [MEMO] for 1 sec. to turn the bank


limit function ON (default) or OFF.
• “BANK” indicator appears or disappears.

D Using the keypad


[MEMO] Keypad q Push [MEMO] to select memory mode.
w Push the desired memory channel number using
the keypad.
• Enter 0 to 999 to select the regular memory channels.
• Enter 1000 to 1099 to select the auto write memory
channels A00 to A99. (Push “10” before entering mem-
ory number instead of A.
• Enter 1100 to 1199 to select the skip memory channels
S00 to S99. (Push “11” before entering memory number
instead of S.
• Enter 1200 to 1219 to select the scan edge channels
P0A to P9B.
1200 (P0A) 1205 (P2B) 1210 (P5A) 1215 (P7B)
1201 (P0B) 1206 (P3A) 1211 (P5B) 1216 (P8A)
1202 (P1A) 1207 (P3B) 1212 (P6A) 1217 (P8B)
1203 (P1B) 1208 (P4A) 1213 (P6B) 1218 (P9A)
1204 (P2A) 1209 (P4B) 1214 (P7A) 1219 (P9B)

e Push [MEMO] to select the desired memory chan-


nel.

[EXAMPLE]
To select the memory channel 3;
- Push [3], then push [MEMO].
To select the memory channel 520;
- Push [5], [2], [0], then push [MEMO].
To select the auto write memory channel A24;
- Push [1], [0], [2], [4], then push [MEMO].
To select the skip channel S65;
- Push [1], [1], [6], [5], then push [MEMO].
To select the scan edge channel P3B;
- Push [1], [2], [0], [7], then push [MEMO].

7-3
7 MEMORY OPERATION

■ Memory channel programming


Memory channel programming can be performed ei-
ther in VFO mode or in memory mode.

D Programming in VFO mode


q Set the desired frequency, operating mode and fil-
ter width in VFO mode.
w Rotate [M-CH] (and [BANK]) to select the desired
memory channel.
• Memory list screen is convenient for selecting the de-
sired channel.
• Memory channel contents appear in the memory chan-
nel readout (below the frequency readout).
[MW] [BANK] [M-CH] • “--.---.--” appears if the selected memory channel is a
blank channel (and does not have contents).
[EXAMPLE]: P
 rogramming 7.088 MHz/LSB into mem-
e Push and hold [MW] for 1 sec. to program the dis-
ory channel 12.
played frequency, operating mode, etc., into the
memory channel.

Rotate

Beep
Beep Push for 1 sec.
Beep

D Programming in memory mode


[EXAMPLE]: P
 rogramming 21.280 MHz/USB into mem- q Select the desired memory channel with [M-CH] in
ory channel 18. memory mode.
• Memory channel contents appear in the memory chan-
nel readout (below the frequency readout).
• “--.---.--” appears if the selected memory channel is a
blank channel (and does not have contents).
w Set the desired frequency and operating mode in
Rotate
memory mode.
• To program a blank channel, use direct frequency entry
with the keypad.
e Push and hold [MW] for 1 sec. to program the dis-
played frequency and operating mode into the
memory channel.
Beep
Beep Push for 1 sec.
Beep

7-4
MEMORY OPERATION 7

■ Frequency transferring
The frequency and operating mode in a memory
channel can be transferred to the VFO.
Frequency transferring can be performed in either
VFO mode or memory mode.

D Transferring in VFO mode


TRANSFERRING EXAMPLE IN VFO MODE This is useful for transferring programmed contents to
Operating frequency : 21.320 MHz/USB (VFO) VFO.
Contents of M-ch 16 : 14.018 MHz/CW
q Select VFO mode with [VFO].
w Select the memory channel to be transferred with
[M-CH] (and [BANK]).
• Memory list screen is convenient for selecting the de-
sired channel.
Rotate
• Memory channel contents appear in the memory chan-
nel readout (below the frequency readout).
• “--.---.--” appears if the selected memory channel is a
blank channel. In this case transferring is impossible.
Beep
e Push and hold [MuV] for 1 sec. to transfer the fre-
Beep Push for 1 sec. quency and operating mode.
Beep
• Transferred frequency and operating mode appear on
the frequency readout.

D Transferring in memory mode


This is useful for transferring frequency and operating
mode while operating in memory mode.

 hen you have changed the frequency or operat-


W
ing mode in the selected memory channel:
• Displayed frequency, mode and filter setting are
transferred.
TRANSFERRING EXAMPLE IN MEMORY MODE • Programmed frequency and mode in the mem-
Operating frequency : 21.320 MHz/USB (M-ch 16) ory channel are not transferred, and they remain
Contents of M-ch 16 : 14.018 MHz/CW in the memory channel.

q Select the memory channel to be transferred with


[M-CH] (and [BANK]) in memory mode.
• And, set the frequency or operating mode if required.
Beep w Push and hold [MuV] for 1 sec. to transfer the fre-
Beep Push for 1 sec.
Beep quency and operating mode.
• D isplayed frequency and operating mode are trans-
ferred to the VFO.
e To return to VFO mode, push [VFO] momentarily.
Programmed contents appear.

7-5
7 MEMORY OPERATION

■ Memory names
All memory channels (including scan edges) can be
tagged with alphanumeric names of up to 10 charac-
ters each.

Capital letters, small letters, numerals, some symbols


(! # $ % & ¥ ? " ’ ` ^ + – ✱ / . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } | _ ~ @)
and spaces can be used.

D Editing (programming) memory names


[ABC]/[abc] [123]/[Symbol] Keypad q P ush [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary.
w Push [F-4•MEMORY] to select memory list screen.
e Select the desired memory channel.
r Push [F-4•NAME] to edit memory channel name.
• A cursor appears and blinks.
• Memory channel names of blank channels cannot be
edited.
t Input the desired character by rotating the main dial
[F-1•�] [F-2•�] [F-3•DEL] [F-4•SPACE] or by editing the keypad for number input.
• Push [ABC] or [abc] to toggle capital and small letters.
• Push [123] or [Symbol] to toggle numerals and sym-
bols.
• Push [F-1•t] or [F-2•u] for cursor movement.
• Push [F-3•DEL] to delete the selected character.
• Push [F-4•SPACE] to input a space.
• Using the receiver’s keypad, [0]–[9], can also enter nu-
merals.
y Push [EXIT/SET] to input and set the name.
• The cursor disappears.
u Repeat steps e to y to program another memory
channel’s name, if desired.
i Push [EXIT/SET] to exit memory list screen.

■ Memory clearing
Any unused memory channels can be cleared. The
cleared memory channels become blank channels.

[M-CL] q Select memory mode with [MEMO].


w Push [F-4•MEMORY] to select memory list screen.
e Select the desired memory channel with [M-CH].
r Push and hold [M-CL] for 1 sec. to clear the con-
tents.
• The programmed frequency and operating mode disap-
pear.
t To clear other memory channels, repeat steps e
and r.

Beep
(CLR) Beep Push for 1 sec.
Beep

7-6
MEMORY OPERATION 7

■ Memory list screen


The memory list screen simultaneously shows 9
memory channels and their programmed contents. 15
memory channels can be displayed in the wide mem-
ory list screen.

You can select a desired memory channel from mem-


ory list screen.

D Selecting a memory channel using the memory list screen


[F-7•WIDE] Main dial q P ush [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary.
w Push [F-4•MEMORY] to select memory list screen.
• [F-7•WIDE] switches the standard and wide screens.
e While pushing [F-1•ROLL], rotate the main dial to
select the desired memory channel.
• [M-CH] can also be used.
r Push [EXIT/SET] to exit memory list screen.

[F-1•ROLL] [F-4•MEMORY] [EXIT/SET] [M-CH]

• Memory list screen


D Confirming programmed memory channels


q Select memory list screen as described above.
w While pushing [F-1•ROLL], rotate the main dial to
scroll the screen.
e Push [F-2•SET] to select the highlighted memory
channel, if desired.
• “ u” appears beside the selected memory channel
number in the memory list screen and the selected
memory channel contents are displayed below the fre-
[F-1•ROLL] [F-2•SET] [EXIT/SET] Main dial quency readout.
r Push [EXIT/SET] to exit memory list screen.

7-7
7 MEMORY OPERATION

D Memory bank set


Setting bank limit function for memory channel selec-
tion, for memory scan can be set in bank set mode or
programming bank name.

[F-6•EDT/BANK] q Select memory list screen as described at previous


page.
w Push and hold [F-6•EDT/BANK] for 1 sec. to dis-
play the memory bank set mode.
e Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired item.
r Rotate the main dial to set the desired setting.
• Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select a default
value.
t Push [EXIT/SET] to return to memory list screen.
[F-1•Y] [F-2•Z] [F-4•DEF] [EXIT/SET] Main dial

BANK (Memory Channels) ON


Selects the bank limit function for memory channel
selection from ON and OFF. (default: ON)

BANK (Memory Scan) ON


Selects the bank limit function for memory scan from
ON and OFF. (default: ON)

• Programming bank names


Capital letters, small letters, numerals, some symbols
(! # $ % & ¥ ? " ’ ` ^ + – ✱ / . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } | _ ~ @)
and spaces can be used for bank name program-
ming.

[ABC]/[abc] [123]/[Symbol] Keypad q Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired mem-
ory bank.
w Push [F-5•EDIT] to edit memory bank name.
• A cursor appears and blinks.
e Input the desired character by rotating the main dial
or by editing the keypad for number input.
• Push [ABC] or [abc] to toggle capital and small letters.
• Push [123] or [Symbol] to toggle numerals and sym-
bols.
[F-1•�] [F-2•�] [F-3•DEL] [F-4•SPACE] • Push [F-1•t] or [F-2•u] for cursor movement.
• Push [F-3•DEL] to delete the selected character.
• Push [F-4•SPACE] to input a space.
• Using the receiver’s keypad, [0]–[9], can also enter nu-
merals.
r Push [EXIT/SET] to input and set the name.
• The cursor disappears.
t Repeat steps q to r to program another memory
bank’s name, if desired.
y Push [EXIT/SET] to return to memory list screen.
7-8
MEMORY OPERATION 7

D Editing memory channel


[F-4•DEL] [F-6•EDT/BANK] q Select memory list screen as described at page 7-7.
w Push [F-6•EDT/BANK] to display the memory edit
screen.
e While pushing and holding [F-1•ROLL], rotate main
dial to select the desired memory channel.
• [M-CH] can also be used.
r Push [F-3•INS] to insert the new channel above the
highlited channel. Or push and hold [F-4•DEL] for 1
sec. to delete the highlited memory channel.
[F-1•ROLL] [F-3•INS] [EXIT/SET] Main dial • When inserting a channel, below the channels scroll
down.
• When deleting a channel, remaining channels scroll up.
t Push [EXIT/SET] to return to memory list screen.

• Editing plural channels


[F-2•BLOCK] [F-4•MOVE] [F-5•COPY] q While pushing and holding [F-1•ROLL], rotate main
dial to select the desired memory channel.
• [M-CH] can also be used.
w P ush [F-2•BLOCK] to set the selected memory
channel.
• Background color of selected channel changes orange.
• Selected channel number is dysplayed.
e While pushing and holding [F-1•ROLL], rotate main
dial to select another edge channel.
[F-1•ROLL] [F-3•CLEAR] [EXIT/SET] Main dial • [M-CH] can also be used.
r P ush [F-2•BLOCK] to set the selected memory
channel.
• Background color of selected channels changes orange.
t Operate the following actions, if desired.
• Clear channels:
➥ Push and hold [F-3•CLEAR] for 1 sec. to clear
the selected channels.
• Remaining channels scroll up.
• Move channels:
z While pushing and holding [F-1•ROLL], rotate
main dial to select the channel which you
want to move the selected channels.
• [M-CH] can also be used.
x Push and hold [F-3•MOVE] for 1 sec. to move
the the channels.
• Copy channels:
z While pushing and holding [F-1•ROLL], rotate
main dial to select the channel which you
want to inset the selected channels.
• [M-CH] can also be used.
x Push and hold [F-4•COPY] for 1 sec. to copy
the channels.
y Push [EXIT/SET] to return to memory list screen.

7-9
SCANS Section 8
■ Scan types ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 8-2
■ Preparation ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 8-3
■ Voice squelch control function ���������������������������������������������������������� 8-3
■ Scan set mode ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 8-4
■ Priority scan��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 8-5
D Setting ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 8-5
D Priority scan operation ������������������������������������������������������������������ 8-5
■ Programmed scan ���������������������������������������������������������������������������� 8-6
D Setting ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 8-6
D Program scan operation ��������������������������������������������������������������� 8-7
■ ∂F scan �������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 8-8
D Setting ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 8-8
D ∂F scan operation ������������������������������������������������������������������������ 8-8
■ Fine programmed scan/fine ∂F scan operation�������������������������������� 8-9
■ Auto memory write scan operation�������������������������������������������������� 8-10
■ Memory scan ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 8-11
D Setting ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 8-11
D Memory scan operation �������������������������������������������������������������� 8-11
D Programming the select memory scan setting ��������������������������� 8-12
D Select memory scan operation ��������������������������������������������������� 8-13
D Mode select memory scan operation ����������������������������������������� 8-14
■ Skip scan ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 8-15
D Specifying skip channels ������������������������������������������������������������ 8-15
D Programming skip frequencies (for programming scan) ������������ 8-15
D Skip scan setting ������������������������������������������������������������������������ 8-15
■ Tone scan ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 8-16
■ Scan resume condition�������������������������������������������������������������������� 8-17
■ Scan speed�������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 8-18
■ Scan delay��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 8-18

8-1
8 SCANS

■ Scan types
PROGRAMMED SCAN ∂F SCAN
Repeatedly scans between two scan edge frequencies Repeatedly scans within ∂F span.
(scan edge memory channels PxA and PxB).

Scan edge Scan edge Start frequency


PxA or PxB PxB or PxA –∂F frequency +∂F frequency

Scan Scan
Scan

Jump Jump

This scan operates in both VFO and memory modes. This scan operates in both VFO and memory modes.

MEMORY SCAN SELECT MEMORY SCAN


Repeatedly scans all programmed memory channels. Repeatedly scans all or one of 9 select memory channels.
Blank channel Blank channel

Mch 2 Mch 3 Mch 4 Mch 2 Mch 3 Mch 4


�2 �1 �2 �1

Mch 1 *“�1,” “�2” and “�3” show that the channel Mch 5 Mch 1 *“�1,” “�2” and “�3” show that the channel Mch 5
�1 is specified as the select memory. �1 �1 is specified as the select memory. �1

Mch 99 Mch 7 Mch 6 Mch 99 Mch 7 Mch 6


�1 �3 �1 �1 �3

This scan operates in memory mode. This scan operates in memory mode.

PRIORITY SCAN MODE SELECT MEMORY SCAN


Continuously switches between monitoring displayed Repeatedly scans a selected mode (ignoring other
frequency and specified memory channel (priority modes) while memory scanning.
channel).
USB CW
FM
VFO Memory
Mch 2 Mch 3 Mch 4
Frequecy Channel FM FM
or Priority Channel
Mch 1 Mch 5
FM FM FSK
Memory Memory
Channel Channel Mch 99 Mch 7 Mch 6
Priority Channel
This scan operates in both VFO and memory modes. This scan operates in memory mode.

FINE SCAN AUTO MEMORY WRITE SCAN


Scans in 10 Hz steps when squelch is open (around the Auto memory write scan operates in the same way as
signal) while program scan or ∂F scan. programmed scan. However, when a signal is received,
the received frequency is automatically written into a
memory channel in the auto write bank.

Scan edge
Squelch open Scan edge
PxA or PxB (10 Hz steps) PxB or PxA Scan edge Mch A0 Mch A99 Scan edge
PxA or PxB PxB or PxA
Program Program
Pause Pause
Scan
Scan
Jump
Jump
This scan operates in both VFO and memory modes. This scan operates in both VFO and memory modes.

8-2
SCANS 8

■ Preparation
• Channels • Scan speed
For programmed scan: Scan speed can be adjusted by [SPEED] controller.
Program scan edge frequencies into scan edge mem- See p. 8-18 for details.
ory channels PxA and PxB.
For ∂F scan: • Squelch condition
Set the ∂F span (∂F scan range) in the scan screen. SCAN
PROGRAMMED
For memory scan: STARTS MEMORY SCAN
SCAN
Program 2 or more memory channels except scan WITH
edge memory channels. The scan continues Scan pauses on
until it is stopped each channel when
For select memory scan: SQUELCH manually, and does the scan resume is
Designate 2 or more memory channels as select OPEN not pause even if it ON; not applicable
memory channels. To designate the channel as a se- detects signals. when OFF.
lect memory channel, choose a memory channel, Scan stops when a signal is detected.
then push [F-3•SELECT] in the scan screen (memory
mode) or in the memory list screen. If you set ‘SCAN RESUME’ to ‘DELAY,’ the
SQUELCH scan pauses according to [DELAY] control
CLOSED when detecting a signal, then resumes.
• Scan resume ON/OFF
You can select the scan to resume or cancel when a When a signal disappears while scan is
paused, scan resumes 2–20 sec. later.
signal is detected. Scan resume ON/OFF must be set
before activating a scan. See p. 8-17 for ON/OFF set-
ting and scan resume condition details.

■ Voice squelch control function


This function is useful when you don’t want unmodu-
lated signals pausing or cancelling a scan. When the
voice squelch control function is activated, the re-
ceiver checks received signals for voice components.

If a receiver signal includes voice components, and


the tone of the voice components changes within
1 sec., scan pauses (or stops). If the received signal
includes no voice components or the tone of the voice
components does not change within 1 sec., scan
resumes.

[VSC] ➥ While a phone mode (FM, WFM, SSB, AM) is se-


lected, push [VSC] to switch the VSC (Voice
Squelch Control) function ON and OFF.
• “ VSC ” appears when the function is activated.

• The VSC function activates for any scan.


• The VSC function resumes the scan on unmodu-
lated signals, regardless of whether the scan
resume condition is set to ON or OFF.

8-3
8 SCANS

■ Scan set mode


This set mode is used to set the skip scan setting,
memory clear condition for auto memory write chan-
nels and appearing scan screen setting.

q Push [F-5•SCAN] to select scan screen.


w Push [F-7•SET] to select scan set mode.
e Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired item.
r Rotate the main dial to select the desired condition.
[F-1•Y] [F-2•Z] [F-4•DEF] [EXIT/SET] Main dial • Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default
setting.
t Push [EXIT/SET] to return to scan menu.

SKIP Function ON
Select the skip scan function ON or OFF. • ON : Scan skips the programmed memory chan-
nel in the skip memory bank while scanning
(default)
• OFF : Skip function OFF

Auto MW SCAN Memory Clear [AUTO] Long Push


Set the clearing condition for the auto memory write • ON : Auto memory channels are cleared when
scan’s memories channels. starting the auto memory write scan.
• [AUTO] Long Push
: Auto memory channels are cleared when
pushing and holding [AUTO]. (default)
• OFF : Auto memory channels must be cleared man-
ually and auto memory write scan stops when
100 channels (A00 to A99) are wrote.

Auto SCAN Screen (SCAN Start) ON


Set the automatic scan screen ON function when • ON : When starting a scan, scan screen appears
starting a scan. automatically. (default)
• OFF : Scan screen does not appear until [F-5•SCAN]
is pushed.

8-4
SCAN 8

■ Priority scan
Priority scan monitors a specified frequency (the pri-
ority channel) once every 1–16 sec. (programmable)
during any operation, such as receiving, scanning
other channels, etc. A total of 10 priority channels can
be programmed.

D Setting
q P ush [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary.
w Push [F-5•SCAN] to select scan setting screen.
e Push [F-1•PRIO] once to enter priority channel se-
lection.
r R otate the main dial to select priority channel
number.
• No.1 to No.9 are available.
[F-1•PRIO] [EXIT/SET] Main dial [BANK]
t Push [F-1•PRIO], then rotate main dial to select the
desired memory channel as priority channel.
y Push [F-1•PRIO] to set the priority scan.
u Set the desired VFO or memory channel.

D Priority scan operation


[SQUELCH] [EXIT/SET] [PRIO]
q P ush [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary.
w Select the desired VFO or memory channel.
e Select the desired operating mode when VFO is
selected.
• The operating mode can also be changed while scan-
ning.
r Set [SQUELCH] control open or closed.
• See page 8-3 for squelch condition.
Scan indicator and Priority scan number appear t Push [PRIO] to start the priority scan.
• “ PRIORITY SCAN ” blinks while scan screen is dis-
played.
• “ PRIO ” blinks while monitoring the priority channel.
y To cancel the scan, push [PRIO].
• Pushing [F5•STOP] also cancels the scan.
• Pushing [EXIT/SET] closes the scan screen, if displayed.

Priority channel indicator



• Monitoring the Priority channel
q Push and hold [PRIO] for 1 sec. to monitor the
priority channel.
• “ PRIO ” blinks while monitoring the priority channel.
w To cancel the monitoring, push [PRIO].

8-5
8 SCANS

■ Programmed scan
Programmed scan searches for signals within a speci-
fied frequency range, using the selected tuning step
increments. The result is like ‘automatically’ rotating of
the main dial.

D Setting
Keypad q P ush [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary.
w Push [F-5•SCAN] to select scan setting screen.
e Push [F-2•PROG] once to enter the programmed
scan selection mode.
r R otate the main dial to select the desired scan
edges.
• A pair of P0A and P0B to P9A and P9B are available.
t Push [F-2•PROG] to enter the start edge frequency
[F-2•PROG] [EXIT/SET] Main dial programming, then edit the desired frequency
using the keypad.
y Push [F-2•PROG] to enter the end edge frequency
programming, then edit the desired frequency
using the keypad.
u Push [F-2•PROG] to enter the operating mode se-
lection, then rotate main dial to select the desired
operating mode.
i Push [F-2•PROG] to enter the filter selection, then
rotate main dial to select the desired filter.
o Push [F-2•PROG] to enter the tuning steps selec-
tion, then rotate main dial or edit using the keypad
to select the desired tuning steps.
!0 Push [F-2•PROG] to set the programmed scan.

8-6
SCANS 8

D Programmed scan operation


[SQUELCH] [EXIT/SET] [PROG] q P ush [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary.
w Select the desired VFO or memory channel.
e Select the desired operating mode.
• The operating mode can also be changed while scan-
ning.
r Set [SQUELCH] control open or closed.
• See page 8-3 for squelch condition.
t Push [PROG] to start the programmed scan.
• Scan screen appears.
Scan indicator and Program scan number appear • “ PROGRAM SCAN ” and decimal points blink while
scanning.
• Push numeral key (0–9) to change to the other edges.
y When the scan detects a signal, the scan stops,
pauses or ignores it depending on the resume set-
ting and the squelch condition.
u To cancel the scan, push [PROG].
• Pushing [F5•STOP] also cancels the scan.
• Pushing [EXIT/SET] closes the scan screen.
i Push and hold [F-6•RECALL] for 1 sec. to recall the
frequency that is set before starting the scan, if de-
sired.

If the same frequencies are programmed into the


scan edge memory channel PxA and PxB, pro-
grammed scan does not start.

✔ For your convenience


Ten programmed scans can be selected directly from
the keypad. Then the scan starts immediately.

➥ Push numeral key (0–9) then push [PROG] to start


the desired programmed scan.

8-7
8 SCANS

■ ∂F scan
∂F scan scans a small range of frequencies around
an operating frequency. ∂F scan center frequency can
be set as specific frequency or as the operating fre-
quency.

D Setting
q P ush [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary.
w Push [F-5•SCAN] to select scan setting screen.
e Push [F-3•∂F] once to enter the center frequency
setting.
r Rotate the main dial to select the ∂F scan center
frequency to fixed frequency or variable frequency.
[F-2•:F] [EXIT/SET] Main dial • Displayed frequency can be changed using the keypad.
• When fixed frequency is selected, frequency appears.
When variable frequency is selected,“---,---,--- MHz” ap-
pears.
t Push [F-3•∂F] then rotate the main dial to set the
∂F span.
• ± 5 kHz, ±10 kHz, ±20 kHz, ±50 kHz, ±100 kHz,
±500 kHz and ±1000 kHz are selectable.
y Push [F-3•∂F] to set the ∂F scan.

D ∂F scan operation


[SQUELCH] [EXIT/SET] [:F] q P ush [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary.
w Select the desired VFO or memory channel.
e Select the desired operating mode.
• The operating mode can also be changed while scan-
ning.
r Set [SQUELCH] control open or closed.
• See page 8-3 for squelch condition.
t Push [∂F] to start the ∂F scan.
• Scan screen appears.
Scan indicator and ∂F scan indicator appear • “ :F SCAN ” and decimal points blink while scanning.
• When the center frequency is fixed and the operating
frequency exceeds the scanning range, ∂F scan jumps
to the fixed center frequency.
y When the scan detects a signal, the scan stops,
pauses or ignores it depending on the resume set-
ting and the squelch condition.
u To cancel the scan, push [∂F].
• Pushing [F5•STOP] also cancels the scan.
• Pushing [EXIT/SET] closes the scan screen.
i Push and hold [F-6•RECALL] for 1 sec. to recall the
frequency that was set before starting the scan, if
desired.

8-8
SCANS 8

■ Fine programmed scan/fine ∂F scan operation


In fine scan (programmed or ∂F), the scan speed de-
creases when the squelch opens, but the receiver
keeps scanning. The scanning tuning step shifts from
50 Hz to 10 Hz when the squelch opens.

[SQUELCH] [EXIT/SET] [:F] q P ush [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-


function screen, if necessary.
w Push [F-5•SCAN] to select the scan screen.
e Set for programmed scan or ∂F scan as described
at p.8-6 and p.8-8.
r Push [PROG] or [∂F] to start a scan.
• “ PROGRAM SCAN ” o r “ :F SCAN ” a n d d e c i m a l
points blink while scanning.
t Push [FINE] to start a fine scan.
[PROG] [FINE] • “ FINE PROGRAM SCAN ” or “ FINE :F SCAN ” blinks in-
stead of “ PROGRAM SCAN ” or “ :F SCAN ,” respec-
tively.
y When the scan detects a signal, the scan speed
decreases but scan does not stop.
u Push [PROG] or [∂F] to stop the scan; push [FINE]
to cancel the fine scan.
• Pushing [F5•STOP] also cancels the scan.
• Pushing [EXIT/SET] closes the scan screen.
i Push and hold [F-6•RECALL] for 1 sec. to recall the
frequency that is set before starting the scan, if de-
sired.

8-9
8 SCANS

■ Auto memory write scan operation


Auto memory write scan operates in the same way as
programmed scan. However, when a signal is received,
the received frequency is automatically written into a
memory channel in the auto write bank (A00–A99).

[SQUELCH] [EXIT/SET] [AUTO] q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multifunc-


tion screen, if necessary.
w Select the desired VFO or memory channel.
e Select the desired operating mode.
• The operating mode can also be changed while scan-
ning.
r Set [SQUELCH] control open or closed.
• See page 8-3 for squelch condition.
t Push [AUTO] to start the auto memory write scan.
• Selected programmed scan start.
Scan indicator and Auto memory write scan number appear • Scan screen appears.
• “ AUTO MEMORY WRITE SCAN ” and decimal points blink
while scanning.
• Push numeral key (0–9) to change to the other edges.
y When the scan detects a signal, the scan stops,
pauses or ignores it depending on the resume set-
ting and the squelch condition.
• The received frequency is automatically written into a
blank memory channel in the auto write bank.
u To cancel the scan, push [AUTO].
• Pushing [F5•STOP] also cancels the scan.
• Pushing [EXIT/SET] closes the scan screen.
i Push and hold [F-6•RECALL] for 1 sec. to recall the
frequency that was set before starting the scan, if
desired.

✔ For your convenience


Ten auto memory write scans can be selected directly
from the keypad. Then the scan starts immediately.

➥ Push numeral key (0–9) then push [AUTO] to start


the desired programmed scan.

 he memory clear setting of the auto write bank can


T
be selected from the starting auto memory write
scan, by pushing and holding [AUTO], or manually.
See scan set mode (p. 8-4) for Auto MW SCAN
Memory Clear details.

8-10
SCANS 8

■ Memory scan
All memory channels (except skip channels) in the
selected bank are scanned at up to 40 ch/sec.

D Setting
q P ush [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary.
w Push [F-5•SCAN] to select scan setting screen.
e Push [F-4•MEMO] once to enter the bank selection.
r Rotate the main dial to select the bank limit setting.
• Selected bank number or OFF (Bank OFF) appears.
t Or rotate [BANK] to select the other bank.
[F-4•MEMO] [EXIT/SET] Main dial [BANK] y Push [F-4•MEMO], then rotate main dial to select
the edge channel.
u Push [F-4•MEMO], then rotate main dial to select
the other edge channel.
i Push [F-4•MEMO], then rotate main dial to select
the desired select memory channel group for select
memory scan.
• ‘★1’ to ‘★9’ and ‘ALL’ are available.
o Push [F-4•MEMO] to set the memory scan.

D Memory scan operation


[SQUELCH] [EXIT/SET] [MEMO] q P ush [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
function screen, if necessary.
w Set the [SQUELCH] control open or closed.
• See page 8-3 for squelch condition.
e Push [MEMO] to start the memory scan.
• Scan screen appears and memory mode is selected
automatically.
• “ MEMORY SCAN ” and decimal points blink during
memory scan.
r When the scan detects a signal, the scan stops,
pauses or ignores it depending on the resume set-
ting and the squelch condition.
t To cancel the scan, push [MEMO].
• Pushing [F5•STOP] also cancels the scan.
• Pushing [EXIT/SET] closes the scan screen.

 or more memory channels must be programmed


2
for memory scan to start.

8-11
8 SCANS

D Programming the select memory scan setting


q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multifunc-
tion screen, if necessary.
w Push [F-4•MEMORY] to select memory list screen.
e While pushing and holding [F-1•ROLL] or [F-2•SET],
rotate the main dial to select the desired memory
channel.
• [M-CH] (or [BANK]) control and direct keypad selection
can be used.
r Push and hold [F-3•SELECT] for 1 sec. to display
the memory-select window.
t Rotate the main dial to select the desired select
memory channel group.
• ★1 to ★9 are selectable.
• Memory-select window y Push [F-3•SELECT] to set the select setting ON.
• Push [F-3•SELECT] again to select the select setting
OFF.
u Repeat steps e to y to program another memory
channel as a select memory channel, if desired.
• If you want to set a same select channel group, skip
steps r and t.
i Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the memory list screen.

D Erasing the select scan setting


q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multifunc-
tion screen, if necessary.
w Push [F-4•MEMORY] to select memory list screen.
e Push and hold [F-3•SELECT] for 1 sec. to display
memory-select window.
r Rotate the main dial to select the desired select
memory channel group to be erased.
t Push and hold [F-2• ALL CLR] for 1 sec. to clear all
select scan settings.
y Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the memory list screen.

8-12
SCANS 8

D Select memory scan operation


Select memory scan allows you to increase scan effi-
ciency by searching for specified channels group only.

[SQUELCH] [EXIT/SET] [SEL] q P ush [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-


function screen, if necessary.
w Set the [SQUELCH] control open or closed.
• See page 8-3 for squelch condition.
e Push [SEL] to start the select memory scan.
• Scan screen appears and memory mode is selected
automatically.
• “ SELECT MEMORY SCAN ” and decimal points blink
during select memory scan.
• Push numeral key (0–9) to change to the other groups.
Scan indicator and select memory group number appear r When the scan detects a signal, the scan stops,
pauses or ignores it depending on the resume set-
ting and the squelch condition.
t To cancel the scan, push [MEMO].
• Pushing [F5•STOP] also cancels the scan.
• Pushing [EXIT/SET] closes the scan screen.

 or more memory channels must be designated as


2
select memory channels, as well as the same se-
lect scan number, for select memory scan to start.

✔ For your convenience


Ten select memory scans can be selected directly
from the keypad. Then the scan starts immediately.

➥ Push numeral key (0–9) then push [SEL] to start


the desired select memory scan.

8-13
8 SCANS

D Mode select memory scan operation


To operate memory scan in a specific mode (ignoring
other modes), the mode select memory scan is avail-
able.

[SQUELCH] [EXIT/SET] [MODE] q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multifunc-


tion screen, if necessary.
w Set the [SQUELCH] control open or closed.
• See page 8-3 for squelch condition.
e Select the desired operating mode.
• The operating mode can also be changed while scan-
ning.
r Push [MODE] to start the mode select memory
scan.
Scan indicator appears • Scan screen appears and memory mode is selected au-
tomatically.
• “ MODE SELECT MEMORY SCAN ” and decimal points
blink during mode select memory scan.
t When the scan detects a signal, the scan stops,
pauses or ignores it depending on the resume set-
ting and the squelch condition.
y To cancel the scan, push [MODE].
• Pushing [F5•STOP] also cancels the scan.
• Pushing [EXIT/SET] closes the scan screen.

 or more memory channels with same operating


2
mode must be programmed for mode select mem-
ory scan to start.

8-14
SCANS 8

■ Skip scan
You can set the selected memory channel as a skip
channel which is skipped during memory scan. Its fre-
quency is also skipped during programmed and auto
memory write scans. This setting is useful to speed up
the scan speed.

D Specifying skip channels


q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multifunc-
tion screen, if necessary.
w Push [F-4•MEMORY] to select memory list screen.
e While pushing and holding [F-1•ROLL] or [F-2•SET],
rotate the main dial to select the memory channel to
be specified as a skip channel.
• [M-CH] (or [BANK]) control and direct keypad selection
can be used.
r Push [F-5•SKIP] to select the skip setting ON.
• “ SKIP ” indicator appears.
• Push [F-5•SKIP] again to select the skip setting OFF.
t Repeat steps e to r to program another memory
channel as a skip channel, if desired.
y Push [EXIT/SET] to exit the memory list screen.

D Programming skip frequencies (for programming scan)


q Start programming scan as described on page 8-7.
w When the scan pauses on an undesired signal,
push and hold [MW] for 1 sec.
• The frequency is memorized into the skip bank as a skip
frequency.

[MW]

D Skip scan setting


q Push [F-5•SCAN] to select scan screen.
w Push [F-7•SET] to select scan set mode.
e Push [F-1•Y] to select “SKIP Function.”
r Rotate the main dial to select the desired condition.
• Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default
setting.
t Push [EXIT/SET] to return to scan menu.
[F-1•Y] [F-4•DEF] [EXIT/SET] Main dial

8-15
8 SCANS

■ Tone scan
The receiver can detect subaudible tones or the DTCS
code in a received signal. By monitoring a signal that
is being operated with tone or DTCS squelch function,
you can determine the tone frequency or DTCS code
necessary to open a squelch.

[F-1•Y] [F-2•Z] [F-4•DEF] [F-6•T-SCAN] q Set the desired frequency or memory channel to be
checked for a tone frequency.
w Push [FM] to select FM mode.
e Push and hold [TONE] for 1 sec. to enter tone fre-
quency screen.
r Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to check the tone squelch
frequency or DTCS code, respectively.
t Push [F-6•T-SCAN] to start the tone scan.
• “SCAN” blinks while scanning.
[TONE] [FM] [EXIT/SET] y When the tone frequency is detected, the tone scan
pauses.
• The tone frequency is set temporarily on a memory
channel. Program into the memory channel to store the
tone frequency permanently.
• The decoded tone frequency is used for the tone squelch
frequency or DTCS squelch code.
u To stop the scan, push [F-6•T-SCAN].
• Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default
frequency.
i Push [EXIT/SET] to exit tone frequency screen.

8-16
SCANS 8

■ Scan resume condition


Scan pauses when finding a signal, and then resumes
or is cancelled depending on the selected scan resume
condition. There are 3 resume conditions.

[DELAY] • Scan resume OFF


Scan pauses until signal disappears, then resumes
after 2 sec.
➥ Push [OFF] to set the scan pause timer to OFF.
• Scan resume indicator above this switch lights green.

Signal no signal receiving a signal no signal

Scan
[OFF] [∞] scanning pausing scanning
2 sec.

• Scan resume ON with specified time period


Scan pauses for the adjusted delay period after receiv-
ing a signal, then resumes. When the received signal
disappears, scan resumes after 2 to 20 sec.
➥ Push [DELAY] to set the scan pause timer to speci-
fied time period according to [DELAY] control. (See
next page for setting scan delay.)
• Scan resume indicator above this switch lights green.
• Scan delay time can be set 2 to 20 sec.

Signal no signal receiving a signal no signal

Scan pausing
scanning scanning
delay time

• Scan cancel
Scan is cancelled when a signal is found during scan.
➥ Push [∞] to set the scan pause timer to infinity (scan
cancel).
• Scan resume indicator above this switch lights green.

no signal receiving a signal no signal
Signal

Scan scan is cancelled


scanning

8-17
8 SCANS

■ Scan speed
➥ Rotate [SPEED] to adjust the scan speed.

[SPEED]

■ Scan delay
➥ R otate [DELAY] to adjust the scan pause time
when the scan resume setting is set to ‘DELAY.’
• Scan delay time can be set 2 to 20 sec.

[DELAY]

8-18
OTHER FUNCTIONS Section 9
■ Voice synthesizer operation �������������������������������������������������������������� 9-2
■ Lock function ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 9-2
D Dial lock function��������������������������������������������������������������������������� 9-2
D Panel lock function������������������������������������������������������������������������� 9-2
■ Dial click function ������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 9-3
■ Antenna selection ����������������������������������������������������������������������������� 9-3
D Antenna type selection ��������������������������������������������������������������� 10-3
D Temporary memory ��������������������������������������������������������������������� 10-4
D Antenna selection mode ������������������������������������������������������������� 10-4
■ Antenna tuner operation ����������������������������������������������������������������� 10-5
D Tuner operation ��������������������������������������������������������������������������� 10-5
D If the tuner cannot tune the antenna ������������������������������������������ 10-6

9-1
9 OTHER FUNCTIONS

■ Voice synthesizer operation


The IC-R9500 has a built-in voice synthesizer to an-
nounce the frequency, mode, etc. (S-meter level can
also be announced—p. 11-10) in clear, electronically-
generated voice, in English (or Japanese).

➥ Push [SPCH] to announce the currently selected


frequency, etc.
• Push [SPCH] for 1 sec. to additionally announce the
selected mode.

➥ Pushing a mode switch also announces the appro-


priate mode. (p. 11-11)
[SPCH]  he output level of the voice synthesizer can be ad-
T
justed in level set mode. (p. 11-6)

■ Lock function
The IC-R9500 has two kinds of lock functions: dial
lock and panel lock. The dial lock function locks only
the main dial, and panel lock function locks all front
panel operation.

D Dial lock function


[LOCK] indicator The dial lock function prevents frequency changes by
accidental movement of the tuning dial. The lock func-
tion electronically locks the dial.

➥ Push [LOCK] to toggle the dial lock function ON or


OFF.
• The [LOCK] indicator lights orange when the dial lock
function is in use.

[LOCK]

D Panel lock function


[PANEL LOCK] indicator To prevent accidental frequency changes and unnec-
essary function access, use the panel lock function.
This function is also available with display sleep mode

➥ Push [PANEL LOCK] to toggle the panel lock func-


tion ON or OFF.
• T he [PANEL LOCK] indicator lights green when the
panel lock function is in use.

➥ Push and hold [PANEL LOCK] for 1 sec. to turn the


[PANEL LOCK] panel lock with display sleep function ON.
• Pushing [PANEL LOCK] turns this function OFF.
• The [PANEL LOCK] indicator lights green and the dis-
play turns OFF when the sleep function is in use.

T he audio controls or any other controls can be


used depending on “[PANEL LOCK] SWITCH” set-
ting in others set mode (p. 11-10) while function ON.

9-2
OTHER FUNCTIONS 9

■ Dial click function


The IC-R9500 can turn the dial click function ON and
OFF. And the auto dial click setting is also available in
the others set mode (p. 11-12).

➥ Push and hold [1/4] for 1 sec. to turn the dial click
function ON and OFF manually.
• “CLICK” appears.

[1/4]

■ Antenna selection

The IC-R9500 has 3 antenna connectors for bands
below 30 MHz which are [HF ANT1], [HF ANT2] and
[ANT1/HF ANT3]. And antenna control voltage is also
output from [ANT SEL] connector for using external
preamplifier or antenna selector.

HF ANT3  or each operating band the IC-R9500 covers, there


F
1150—3335MHz 30—1150MHz HF ANT2 HF ANT1 is a band memory which can memorize a selected
antenna. When you change the operating frequency
beyond a band, the previously used antenna is auto-
matically selected (see left) for the new band. This
function allows automatic switching of 3 separate an-
tennas for HF bands operation.

After an antenna has been selected for use (by push-


ing [ANT]), the antenna is automatically selected
whenever that band is used.

[EXAMPLE]: a 3.5/7 MHz antenna is connected to


IC-R9500 [HF ANT1], a 14/18 MHz antenna is connected to [HF
ANT2], a 24/28 MHz antenna is connected to [HF
ANT3]. After each antenna is selected, an antenna is
automatically selected when changing bands.

• Antenna selection
[ANT] ➥ Push [ANT] to select the antenna from “ANT HF 1,”
“ANT HF 2” and “ANT HF 3.”
• The antenna indicator turns ON when other than de-
fault antenna (ANT1) is selected.

➥ Push and hold [ANT] for 1 sec to turn the antenna


control voltage ON and OFF from [ANT SEL] con-
nector.
• When it’s ON, “★” appears. Then the receiver output
13.8 V/100 mA max. from [ANT SEL] connector.

9-3
CLOCK AND TIMERS Section 10
■ Time set mode �������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 10-2
■ Daily timer setting ��������������������������������������������������������������������������� 10-3
■ Setting sleep timer �������������������������������������������������������������������������� 10-4
■ Timer operation ������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 10-4

10-1
10 CLOCK AND TIMERS

■ Time set mode


The IC-R9500 has a built-in calendar and 24-hour clock
[ABC]/[abc] [F-4•DEL] with daily power ON/OFF timer functions. Before operat-
[123]/[Symbol] [F-5•EDIT]/[F-5•SET]
ing these timer functions, set the current date and time.

q Push [EXIT/SET] to close multifunction screen, if


necessary.
w Push [F-7•SET] to select set mode menu screen.
e Push [F-4•TIME] to select time set mode.
r Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired item.
t Rotate the main dial to set or select the desired
[F-1•Y] [F-2•Z] [F-3•� �] [EXIT/SET] Main dial value or condition.
y Push [EXIT/SET] to exit time set mode.
Sets the date.

Date 2000 – 1 – 1 ( Sat )


z Push [F-3•t u] to select between the year and the
month/day, then rotate the main dial to select them.
• The date setting and “DATE-set Push [SET]” indication
blink.
x Push [F-5•SET] to set the date.

Time (Now) 1:23


Sets the local time. z Rotate the main dial to set the local time.
• The time setting and “TIME-set Push [SET]” indication
blink.
x Push [F-5•SET] to set the time.

CLOCK2 Function ON
Turns the clock 2 display ON and OFF. • ON : Clock 2 is displayed below the local time dis-
The clock 2 is convenient to indicate UTC or another play.
country’s local time, etc. • OFF : The clock 2 is not displayed.

CLOCK2 Offset 0:00


Sets the desired offset time period for clock 2 within • Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select the default
–24:00 to +24:00 in 5 min. steps. value.

CLOCK2 Name UTC


Sets the desired 3-character name for clock 2. z Push [F-5•EDIT] to select the name edit condition.
• The cursor under the 1st character blinks.
Capital letters, small letters, numerals, some symbols x Push [ABC], [abc], [123] or [Symbol] to select the
(! # $ % & ¥ ? " ’ ` ^ + – ✱ / . , : ; = < > ( ) [ ] { } | _ ~ @) character group, then rotate the main dial to select
and spaces can be used. the character.
• Push [ABC] or [abc] to toggle capital and small letters.
• Push [123] or [Symbol] to toggle numerals and sym-
bols.
• Push [F-1•t] or [F-2•u] for cursor movement.
• Push [F-3•DEL] to delete the selected character.
• Push [F-4•SPACE] to input a space.
• Using the receiver’s keypad, [0]–[9], can also enter nu-
merals.
c Push [EXIT/SET] to set the name.

10-2
CLOCK AND TIMERS 10

■ Daily timer setting


The receiver turns power ON and/or OFF automati-
cally at the specified day and time, with the specified
frequency settings.

[F-2•TIMER2]/[F-2•�] [F-7•SET] q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close multifunc-


[F-4•TIMER4]/[F-4•CLR] tion screen, if necessary.
w Push [TIMER] for 1 sec. to select timer set screen.
e Push one of [F-1•TIMER1] to [F-5•TIMER5] to se-
lect the desired timer.
r Rotate the main dial to select the timer action ON
and OFF.
t Push [F-2•u] to select the “DAY” cell, then rotate the
main dial to select the desired day of the week.
[TIMER] [F-3•TIMER3] [EXIT/SET] Main dial • Select “– – –” not to specify daily operation and activate
[F-1•TIMER1]/[F-1•�] the timer every day.
• Once a day of the week is selected, push [F-4•CLR] for
1 sec. to select “– – –.”
y Push [F-2•u] to select the “REPEAT” cell, then ro-
tate the main dial to select the repeat function ON
or OFF.
• ON : The timer functions every selected day of the
week. (repeats)
• OFF : The timer does not repeat.
u Push [F-2•u ] to select the “ON” cell, then rotate
the main dial to set the desired receiver power ON
time.
• When using power OFF timer only, push [F-4•CLR] for
1 sec. to select “– – –.”
i Push [F-2•u ] to select the “OFF” cell, then rotate
the main dial to set the desired receiver power OFF
time.
• When using power ON timer only, push [F-4•CLR] for
1 sec. to select “– – –.”
o Push [F-2•u ] to select the “Mch” cell, then rotate
the main dial to select the desired memory channel
number in the main readout.
• If using the currently set VFO condition in main readout,
push [F-4•CLR] for 1 sec. to select “– – –.”
!0 Push [F-7•SET] to set the timer.
• The timer indicator above [TIMER] switch lights green.
!1 Repeat steps e to !0 to set other timers, if desired.
!2 Push [EXIT/SET] to exit timer set screen.

10-3
10 CLOCK AND TIMERS

■ Setting sleep timer


[F-7•SLEEP]/[F-7•SET] The sleep timer turns the receiver power OFF auto-
matically after a set period. The timer can be set to
5–120 min. in 5 min. steps.

The sleep timer function counts the ‘minute’ unit, and


does not count the ‘second’ unit. For example, when
the sleep timer is started at 12:00 59, first one minute
past for just 1 sec. That is way it has max. 59 sec. an
error. This is normal, not a malfunction.
[TIMER] [F-4•CLR] [EXIT/SET] Main dial q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multifunc-
tion screen, if necessary.
w Push [TIMER] for 1 sec. to select timer set screen.
e Push [F-7•SLEEP] to select the sleep timer set con-
dition.
• “– – –” blinks.
r Set the desired time period using the main dial.
• “TIMER–set Push [SET]” blinks.
• Push [F-4•CLR] to select “– – –” to cancel the setting.
t Push [F-7•SET] to set the time.
• Push [EXIT/SET] to cancel the setting.
• The timer indicator above [TIMER] switch lights green.
y Push [EXIT/SET] to exit timer set screen.
u The receiver emits 10 beeps and turns OFF after
the sleep timer period elapses.
• The timer indicator blinks while beeping.
• Push [TIMER] momentarily to cancel the sleep timer, if
desired.

■ Timer operation
q Preset the daily timer as described previously.
w Push [TIMER] momentarily to turn the timer function
ON.
• The timer indicator above this switch lights green when
the timer function is ON.
e Push and hold [POWER] for 1 sec. to turn the power
OFF.
• The timer indicator lights continuously.
[TIMER] [POWER]
r When the set time arrives, the power is automati-
cally turned ON.
t The receiver emits 10 beeps and turns OFF after
the power-off period elapses.
• The timer indicator blinks while beeping.
• Push [TIMER] momentarily to cancel the sleep timer, if
desired.

 he timer action in timer set screen must be turned


T
ON to enable the timer operation, described above
“Setting sleep timer” steps r.

10-4
SET MODE Section 11
■ Set mode description ���������������������������������������������������������������������� 11-2
D Set mode operation �������������������������������������������������������������������� 11-2
D Screen arrangement ������������������������������������������������������������������� 11-3
■ Level set mode ������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 11-4
■ ACC set mode �������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 11-7
■ Display set mode ���������������������������������������������������������������������������� 11-8
■ Others set mode ��������������������������������������������������������������������������� 11-10
■ CF card/USB-Memory set menu �������������������������������������������������� 11-16
D CF/USB-Memory set screen arrangement ������������������������������� 11-16
D Load option set mode ��������������������������������������������������������������� 11-17
■ File saving ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 11-18
■ File loading ����������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 11-19
■ Changing the file name ���������������������������������������������������������������� 11-20
■ File copying ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 11-21
■ Deleting a file �������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 11-22
■ Unmount an USB-Memory ����������������������������������������������������������� 11-22
■ Formatting the CF card or USB-Memory�������������������������������������� 11-23
■ Display set (Video) mode ������������������������������������������������������������� 11-24
■ LCD set mode ������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 11-26

11-1
11 SET MODE

■ Set mode description


Set mode is used for programming infrequently
changed values or conditions of functions. The IC-
R9500 has a level set mode, display set mode, timer
set mode, accessory set mode, others set mode and
CF/USB-Memory set mode.

D Set mode operation


[F-1•LEVEL] [F-5•OTHERS] [F-7•CF/USB]  q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multifunc-
tion screen, if necessary.
w Push [F-7•SET] to select set mode menu screen.
• Pushing and holding [EXIT/SET] for 1 sec. also selects
set mode menu screen.
e P ush [F-1•LEVEL], [F-2•ACC], [F-3•DISP],
[F-4•TIME], [F-5•OTHERS] or [F-7•CF/USB] to
enter the desired set mode.
r For level, accessory, display and others set mode,
[F-2•ACC] [F-3•DISP] [F-4•TIME] [EXIT/SET] Main dial push [F-7•WIDE] to toggle wide and normal
screen.
t Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired item,
then rotate main dial to adjust/select the desired
value or condition.
• Pushing [F-3•t u] operation may be necessary for
some items.
y Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit set mode.

11-2
SET MODE 11

D Screen arrangement

• Display set mode (p. 11-8)

• Set mode menu screen (p. 11-2) • Time set mode (p. 10-2)

• Level set mode (p. 11-4) • Others set mode (p. 11-10)

• ACC set mode (p. 11-7) • CF/USB-Memory set menu (p. 11-16)

11-3
11 SET MODE

■ Level set mode


FM Tone (Bass) 0
Sets the bass level of the receive audio in FM mode
from –15 to +15. (default: 0)

FM Tone (Treble) 0
Sets the treble level of the receive audio in FM mode
from –15 to +15. (default: 0)

WFM Tone (Bass) 0


Sets the bass level of the receive audio in WFM mode
from –15 to +15. (default: 0)

WFM Tone (Treble) 0


Sets the treble level of the receive audio in WFM
mode from –15 to +15. (default: 0)

AM Tone (Bass) 0
Sets the bass level of the receive audio in AM mode
from –15 to +15. (default: 0)

AM Tone (Treble) 0
Sets the treble level of the receive audio in AM mode
from –15 to +15. (default: 0)

SSB Tone (Bass) 0


Sets the bass level of the receive audio in SSB mode
from –15 to +15. (default: 0)

SSB Tone (Treble) 0


Sets the treble level of the receive audio in SSB mode
from –15 to +15. (default: 0)

CW Tone (Bass) 0
Sets the bass level of the receive audio in CW mode
from –15 to +15. (default: 0)

CW Tone (Treble) 0
Sets the treble level of the receive audio in CW mode
from –15 to +15. (default: 0)

11-4
SET MODE 11

■ Level set mode (continued)


FSK Tone (Bass) 0
Sets the bass level of the receive audio in FSK mode
from –15 to +15. (default: 0)

FSK Tone (Treble) 0


Sets the treble level of the receive audio in FSK mode
from –15 to +15. (default: 0)

De-Emphasis (FM 50k) OFF


De-emphasis is the use of an amplitude-frequency
characteristic complimentary to the one used for pre-
emphasis prior to transmission.

Sets the de-emphasis circuit ON and OFF when the


50 kHz width filter is used in FM mode. (default: OFF)

(FM 15k) ON
Sets the de-emphasis circuit ON and OFF when the
15 kHz width filter is used in FM mode. (default: ON)

(FM 7k) ON
Sets the de-emphasis circuit ON and OFF when the
7  kHz width filter is used in FM mode. (default: ON)

AF High Cut (FM 50k) OFF


Sets the AF high cut filter circuit ON and OFF when
the 50 kHz width filter is used in FM mode. (default:
OFF)

(FM 15k) ON
Sets the AF high cut filter circuit ON and OFF when
the 15 kHz width filter is used in FM mode. (default:
ON)

(FM 7k) ON
Sets the AF high cut filter circuit ON and OFF when
the 7 kHz width filter is used in FM mode. (default:
ON)

(WFM) OFF
Sets the AF high cut filter circuit ON and OFF in WFM
mode. (default: OFF)

11-5
11 SET MODE

■ Level set mode (continued)


(AM) OFF
Turns the AF high cut filter circuit ON and OFF in AM
mode. (default: OFF)

(SSB) ON
Turns the AF high cut filter circuit ON and OFF in SSB
mode. (default: ON)

(CW) ON
Turns the AF high cut filter circuit ON and OFF in CW
mode. (default: ON)

(FSK) ON
Turns the AF high cut filter circuit ON and OFF in FSK
mode. (default: ON)

(P25) ON
Turns the AF high cut filter circuit ON and OFF in P25
mode. (default: ON)

Speech Level 50%


Sets the voice synthesizer audio output level from 0
to 100% in 1% steps. (default: 50%)

Beep Level 50%


Sets the key-touch beep output level from 0 to 100%
in 1% steps. (default: 50%)

Beep Level Limit ON


Turns the key-touch beep output level limiting capabil-
ity from ON and OFF. (default: ON)

Phones Level Ratio 1.00


Sets the ratio for audio output level from the head-
phone to the internal speaker from 0.60 to 1.40 range
in 0.01 steps. (default: 1.00)

11-6
SET MODE 11

■ ACC set mode


SPEECH OUT Level 50%
Sets the speech audio output level from [SPEECH
OUT] from 0 to 100% in 1% steps.
• Outputs approx. 200 mV at 50% (default) setting.

S/PDIF Output Level 100%


Sets the desired output level of [S/P DIF OUT], from 0
to 100% in 1% steps. (default: 100%)

REC Remote (External) OFF


Turns the control signal of external equipment output • OFF : No signal output from [REC REMOTE]
capability ON and OFF. (default: OFF) jacks. (default)
• ON : T he [REC REMOTE] jacks shorts to
ground when receiving a signal or the
squelch is open.

External Meter Output Signal


Selects the squelch condition output for an external • Signal : Outputs the receiving signal strength
meter indication from pin 8 of [ACC]. level during receiving. (default)
• Signal+SQL : Outputs the receiving signal strength
level during receiving and outputs
squelch open/close condition.

External Meter Level 50%


Sets the output level for an external meter indication • Approx. 2.5 V at 50% (default) setting for full-scale indica-
from 0 to 100% range in 1% steps. tion. (4.7 kΩ impedance)

External
ReferenceMeter Level
IN/OUT OFF 50%
Selects the receiver’s reference signal condition from • IN : Use an external reference signal for the IC-
IN, OFF and OUT. R9500. Turn the receiver power OFF then
ON to make the setting effective.
• OFF : No input or output of the reference signal.
(default)
• OUT : Outputs the IC-R9500 reference signal to
externally connected equipment(s) for their
reference.

 OTE: If the applied reference signal is off-fre-


N
quency, or no signal is applied with “IN” selection,
the IC-R9500 will not work properly. Select “OFF”
or “OUT” then reboot the IC-R9500.

REF Adjust 40%


Adjusts the internal reference frequency within 0 to NOTE: Default setting is different for each receiver.
100% in 1% steps during frequency calibration.

11-7
11 SET MODE

■ Display set mode NOTE: “Display set (Video) mode” is described on page 11-24.

Display Type A
Selects the desired display type from A and B.
(default: A)

Signal Meter S
Selects the desired signal meter type from “S,” “dBµ,”
“dBµ[EMF]” and “dBm.”
(default: S)

Meter Peak Hold ON


Turns the meter peak hold function ON or OFF.
(default: ON)
This function is used for the bar meter only.

Memory Name ON
Sets the memory name indication, during memory • ON : The programmed memory name is displayed
mode operation, ON and OFF. (default: ON) above the frequency indication.
• OFF : No memory name is displayed even a mem-
ory name is programmed.

APF-Width Popup (APF OFF➞ON) ON


Selects the pop-up indication of the APF filter width
ON and OFF when the APF function is turned ON.
(default: ON)

MN-Q Popup (MN OFF➞ON) ON


Selects the pop-up indication of the notch filter width
ON and OFF when the notch filter is turned ON.
(default: ON)

P25 RX ID Popup ON (Dec)


Selects the pop-up indication of the received ID in • ON (Hex) : The received ID code (hexadecimal indi-
P25 mode ON and OFF. (default: ON) cation) is displayed when an ID code is
received.
• ON (Dec) : The received ID code (decimal indication)
is displayed when an ID code is received.
(default)
• OFF : No ID code is displayed when an ID code
is received.

Screen Saver Function 60min


Turns the screen saver function ON (15, 30 or 60 min- The screen saver will activate when no operation is
utes) and OFF. (default: 60 min.) performed for the selected time period to protect the
LCD from “burn-in.”

11-8
SET MODE 11

■ Display set mode (continued)


External Display OFF
Select “ON” when the external display is connected. • At least 800×600 pixel resolution is required for the dis-
(default: OFF) play.

External Display Sync Pulse H


Selects the suitable pulse level for the connected ex-
ternal display from H and L. (default: H)

Opening Message ON
Turns the opening message screen indication capa-
bility ON and OFF. (default: ON)

Opening Comment
Sets the introductory text, up to 10-character long, z Push [F-5•EDIT] to select the comment edit condi-
displayed in the opening screen. tion.
• The cursor under the 1st character blinks.
Capital letters, small letters, numerals, some symbols x Push [ABC], [abc], [123] or [Symbol] to select the
(– / . @) and spaces can be used. character group, then rotate the main dial to select
the character.
• Push [ABC] or [abc] to toggle capital and small letters.
• Push [123] or [Symbol] to toggle numerals and sym-
bols.
• Push [F-1•t] or [F-2•u] for cursor movement.
• Push [F-3•DEL] to delete the selected character.
• Push [F-4•SPACE] to input a space.
• Using the receiver’s keypad, [0]–[9], can also enter nu-
merals.
c Push [EXIT/SET] to set the comment.

11-9
11 SET MODE

■ Others set mode


Calibration Marker OFF
This item is used for a simple frequency check of the
receiver. (default: OFF)
See p. 12-5 for calibration procedure.

 OTE: Turn the calibration marker OFF after


N
checking the frequency of the receiver.

Beep (Confirmation) ON
A beep sounds each time a switch is pushed to con-
firm it. This function can be turned OFF for silent op-
eration. (default: ON)

The beep output level can be set in level set mode.


(p. 11-6)

Beep Sound 1000Hz


Sets the desired key-touch beep sound frequency
from 500 to 2000 Hz in 10 Hz steps. (default:
1000 Hz)

[PANEL LOCK] SWITCH ALL


Selects the Panel lock function activity from “ALL” and ALL : All dials, keys and switches are locked when
“KEY.” (default: ALL) function ON.
KEY : Following controller are active when function
ON.
[TWIN PBT], [SQUELCH], [AGC], [NOTCH],
[NB LEVEL], [NR LEVEL], [AF], [RF], [TRE-
BLE] and [BASS] controls

SPEECH Language English


Selects the speech language from English and Japa-
nese. (default: English)

SPEECH Speed High


Selects the speech speed from HIGH (faster) and
LOW (slower). (default: HIGH)

SPEECH S-Level ON
The IC-R9500 speech processor has frequency,
mode and signal level announcement. Signal level
announcement can be deactivated if desired.
(default: ON)

When “OFF” is selected, the signal level is not an-


nounced.

11-10
SET MODE 11

■ Others set mode (continued)


SPEECH [MODE] SWITCH OFF
Selects the operating mode speech capability when a
mode switch is pushed; ON or OFF.
(default: OFF)

When “ON” is selected, the selected operating mode


is announced when a mode switch is pushed.

REC SPEECH OFF


Selects the frequency speech capability when scan • ON : T he frequency is announced through the
stops; ON or OFF. [REC OUT]/[LINE OUT] or [SPEECH OUT]
when scan stops.
 OTE: Output jacks are selected depending on
N • OFF : No speech audio outputs when scan stops.
“SPEECH Mix” settings. See the combination of
“REC SPEECH” and “SPEECH Mix” settings in the
table below.

SPEECH Mix All


Selects the speech audio output from the [REC OUT] • All : Outputs the speech audio when speech
or [LINE OUT]. operation is performed from the front
panel or depends on above “REC
 OTE: See the combination of “REC SPEECH”
N SPEECH” setting. (default)
and “SPEECH Mix” settings below table. • Operation : Outputs the speech audio when speech
operation is performed from the front
panel.
• OFF : N o speech audio outputs from [REC
OUT] or [LINE OUT].

• Combination of REC SPEECH and SPEECH Mix settings


Switch setting Speech operation from front panel Scan stops
REC SPEECH Internal [REC OUT] / Internal [REC OUT] /
[SPEECH OUT] [SPEECH OUT]
SPEECH Mix Speaker [LINE OUT] Speaker [LINE OUT]
All ✔ ✔ ✔ – – –
OFF Operation ✔ ✔ ✔ – – –
OFF – – ✔ – – –
All ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
ON Operation ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ – ✔
OFF – – ✔ – – ✔

11-11
11 SET MODE

■ Others set mode (continued)


MAIN DIAL Auto TS High
Sets the auto tuning step function for the main dial. • HIGH : Auto tuning step is turned ON. Fastest tun-
When rotating the main dial rapidly, the tuning step ing step during rapid rotation. (default)
automatically changes several times as selected. • LOW : Auto tuning step is turned ON. Faster tun-
ing step during rapid rotation.
There are 2 type of auto tuning steps: HIGH (Fastest) • OFF : Auto tuning step is turned OFF.
and LOW (Faster). (default: HIGH)

MAIN DIAL Click Mode Auto


Sets the dial click function for the main dial from Auto • Auto : Sets the dial click function automatically
or Manual. when a tuning step is set higher than 5
kHz or changing the set mode contents,
etc. (default)
• Manual : Sets the dial click function manually.

 OTE: When “Manual” is selected, set the next


N
item “MAIN DIAL CLICK” ON or OFF.

MAIN DIAL Click Auto


Sets the dial click function ON or OFF. This item can • Auto : Selection can not be changed, set the previ-
be set when the previous item “MAIN DIAL Click ous item to “Manual” in advance. (default)
Mode” is set to “Manual.” • ON : The dial click function is ON, “CLICK” indicator
appears on the display.
 OTE: When the previous item is set to “Auto,” this
N • OFF : The dial click function is OFF.
item is fixed “Auto.”

MAIN DIAL Click (Set mode, etc) ON


Selects the dial click function while setting the set • ON : The main dial click function is ON.
mode items, etc. from ON and OFF. (default: ON) • OFF : The main dial click function is OFF.

MAIN DIAL Operation (SCAN) Up/Down


Selects the main dial function while scanning from • OFF : The main dial stops scan.
OFF and Up/Down. (default: Up/Down) • Up/Down : The main dial changes scanning direc-
tion Up or Down.

AFC Limit ON
The AFC function automatically compensates the • ON : AFC function stops to tune when frequency
tuning when a received frequency drifts or goes off goes off the limited frequency range even if
frequency. received frequency is off frequency. (default)
• OFF : AFC function continues to tune until displayed
This item sets the AFC limit function ON and OFF. frequency changes to reflect the center of the
signal.

11-12
SET MODE 11

■ Others set mode (continued)


SSB/CW Synchronous Tuning OFF
Selects the displayed frequency shift function from • ON : The displayed frequency shifts when the op-
ON and OFF. (default: OFF) erating mode is changed between SSB and
CW.
When this function is activated, the received signal • OFF : The displayed frequency does not shift.
will continue to be received even when the operating
mode is changed between SSB and CW.

 he frequency shifting value may differ according


T
to the CW pitch setting.

CW Normal Side LSB


Selects the side band used to receive CW in CW nor-
mal mode. (default: LSB)

APF Type SOFT


Sets audio filter shape for APF from SOFT and • SOFT : S oft filter shape makes distinguishing
SHARP. (default : SOFT). noise and signals easier. The audio filter
width is related to the CW pitch setting.
• SHARP : Sharp filter shape rejects interference sig-
nals. The audio filter width is fixed.

11-13
11 SET MODE

■ Others set mode (continued)


CI-V Baud Rate Auto
Sets the CI-V data transfer rate. 300, 1200, 4800,
9600, 19200 bps and “Auto” are available. (default:
Auto)

When “Auto” is selected, the baud rate is automati-


cally set according to the data rate of connected
controller.

CI-V Address 72h


To distinguish equipment, each CI-V transceiver or
receiver has its own Icom standard address in hexa-
decimal code. The IC-R9500’s address is 72h.

When 2 or more IC-R9500’s are connected to an


optional CT-17 ci-v level converter, rotate the main
dial to select a different address for each IC-R9500;
the range is 01h to 7Fh.

CI-V Transceive ON
Transceive operation is possible with the IC-R9500
connected to other Icom transceivers or receivers.

When “ON” is selected, changing the frequency,


operating mode, etc. on the IC-R9500 automatically
changes those of connected transceivers (or receiv-
ers) and vice versa.

RS-232C Function CI-V


Select [RS-232C] connector output data format from • CI-V : Outputs data in CI-V format. (default)
CI-V and Decode. • Decode : Outputs decoded contents in ASCII code
format.

Decode Baud Rate 9600


Selects data transmission speed (Baud rate) when
“Decode” is selected in “RS-232C Function” above;
settings are 300, 1200, 4800, 9600 and 19200 bps.
(default: 9600)

Keyboard Type English


Selects the connected keyboard type from Japa-
nese, English, United Kingdom, French, French (Ca-
nadian), German, Portuguese, Portuguese (Brazil-
ian), Spanish, Spanish (Latin American) and Italian.
(default: English)

11-14
SET MODE 11

■ Others set mode (continued)


Keyboard Repeat Delay 250ms
Sets the time per iod for delay within 100 to
1000 msec. in 50 msec. steps. (default: 250 msec.)

When a key of the connected keyboard is pressed


and held for the set period, the character is input
continuously.

Keyboard Repeat Rate 10.9cps


Sets the repeating rate for the connected keyboard • Available repeating rate
within 2.0 to 30.0 cps. (default: 10.9 cps) 2.0, 2.1, 2.3, 2.5, 2.7, 3.0, 3.3, 3.7, 4.0, 4.3, 4.6, 5.0,
 *cps=character per second 5.5, 6.0, 6.7, 7.5, 8.0, 8.6, 9.2, 10.0, 10.9, 12.0,
13.3, 15.0, 16.0, 17.1, 18.5, 20.0, 21.8, 24.0, 26.7,
When a key of the connected keyboard is pressed 30.0
and held, the character is repeatedly input with the
set speed.

IP Address (Valid after Reboot) 192.168. 0. 1


Sets IP address for the IC-R9500 when connecting Turn the receiver power OFF then ON to make the
to your PC or LAN (Local Area Network) through the setting effective. See p. 15-7 for details.
Ethernet connector.

Subnet Mask (Valid after Reboot) 255.255.255. 0 (24bit)


Sets subnet mask for the IC-R9500 when connecting Turn the receiver power OFF then ON to make the
to your PC or LAN (Local Area Network) through the setting effective. See p. 15-7 for details.
Ethernet connector.

11-15
11 SET MODE

■ CF card/USB-Memory set menu


D CF/USB-Memory set screen arrangement
• CF/USB-Memory set menu

• Setting load screen (p. 11-19) • Firmware update (p. 15-4)

Updating the firmware is very risky. If you make a mistake, the IC-R9500 may
not operate properly, and repair at Icom Inc, (Japan) may be the only way to
fix it.

You undertake the updating of the firmware at your own risk and responsibility.
Please refer to the firmware download homepage and/or the instruction manual
for the correct procedures in updating the firmware.

• Load option set mode (p. 11-17) • Format menu (p. 11-23)

• Setting save screen (p. 11-18) • Unmount USB-Memory (p. 11-22)

• Copy files (p. 11-21)

11-16
SET MODE 11

D Load option set mode


LOAD Contents Select
Selects file loading condition from All and Select. • All : Loads and sets the all following contents.
(default: Select) • Select : Loads and sets the selected contents only.

REF IN/OUT, REF Adjust NO


Selects the reference signal setting loading condition • YES : Loads and sets the reference signal setting.
YES and NO. (default: NO). • NO : Use the original reference signal setting.

IP Address, Subnet Mask NO


Selects the IP address and subnet mask setting load- • YES : Loads and sets the IP address and subnet
ing condition YES and NO. (default: NO). mask setting.
• NO : Use the original IP address and subnet
mask setting.

CI-V Address NO
Selects the CI-V address setting loading condition • YES : Loads and sets the CI-V address setting.
YES and NO. (default: NO). • NO : Use the original CI-V address setting.

Other Memory & Settings YES


Selects memory channel contents and other settings • YES : Loads and sets memory channel contents
loading condition YES and NO. (default: YES). and other settings.
• NO : Use the original memory channel contents
and other settings.

11-17
11 SET MODE

■ File saving
Memory channel contents, set mode settings, etc. can
be saved into the CF (Compact Flash) memory card or
USB-memory for backup.

[F-4•EDIT] [F-7•WIDE]/[F-7•CANCEL]  q During set mode menu screen indication, push


[F-7•CF/USB] to select CF/USB-Memory set menu
screen.
w Push [F-2•SAVE] to select setting save screen.
e Change the following conditions if desired.
• File name:
z Push [F-4•EDIT] to select file name edit condi-
tion.
[F-1•DIR/FILE] [F-6•SAVE]/[F-6•OK] [EXIT/SET] Main dial • Push [F-1• DIR/FILE] several times to select the
file name, if necessary.
 x Push [ABC], [123] or [Symbol] to select the
character group, then rotate the main dial to
select the character.
• Push [123] or [Symbol] to toggle numerals and
symbols.
• [ABC] : A to Z (capital letters); [123]: 0 to 9 (nu-
merals); [Symbol]: ! # $ % & ‘ ` ^ + – = ( ) [ ] { } _ ~
@ can be selected.
 • Push [F-1•t] to move the cursor left, push [F-
2•u] to move the cursor right, push [F-3•DEL] to
delete a character and push [F-4•SPACE] to in-
sert a space.
c Push [EXIT/SET] to set the file name.

• Saving location
 z P ush [F-1•DIR/FILE] to select tree view
screen.
• Push and hold [F-1•DIR/FILE] for 1 sec. once or
twice to select the CF card or USB-Memory, when
USB memory is Inserted.
x Select the desired directory or folder in the CF
memory card.
 • Push [F-4•t u] to select the upper directory.
• Push [F-2•Y] or [F-3•Z] to select folder in the
same directory.
• Push and hold [F-4•t u] for 1 sec. to select a
folder in the directory.
• Push [F-5•REN/DEL] to rename the folder.
• Push and hold [F-5•REN/DEL] for 1 sec. to delete
the folder.
 • Push and hold [F-6•MAKE] for 1 sec. to making a
new folder. (Edit the name with the same manner
as the “• File name” above.)
c Push [F-1•DIR/FILE] twice to select the file
name.
r Push [F-6•SAVE].
• Confirmation screen appears.
 t Push [F-6•OK] to save.
• After saving is completed, return to CF/USB-Memory
set menu automatically.

11-18
SET MODE 11

■ File loading
By loading the saved setting file from the CF memory
card or USB-Memory, you can easily set up another
IC-R9500—several operators settings can easily be
applied to one IC-R9500.
[F-4•LOAD] [F-5•OPTION] [F-7•WIDE]/[F-7•CANCEL]
q During set mode menu screen indication, push
[F-7•CF/USB] to select CF/USB-Memory set menu
screen.
w Push [F-1•LOAD] to select setting load screen.
e Push [F-5•OPTION] to select load option set mode,
then set the desired loading conditions, if desired.
• See page 11-17 for details.
r Push and hold [F-1•DIR/FILE] for 1 sec. once or
[F-1•DIR/FILE] [F-2•Y] [F-3•Z] [EXIT/SET] twice to select the CF card or USB-Memory, when
[F-6•SORT]/[F-6•OK] USB memory is Inserted.
t Push [F-2•Y] or [F-3•Z] to select the desired set-
ting file.
 y Push [F-4•LOAD].
• Confirmation screen appears.
u Push [F-6•OK] to starts loading.
• After the loading is completed, the message dialog, “Re-
boot the IC-R9500,” appears.
i Turn the receiver power OFF then ON to make the
setting effective.


11-19
11 SET MODE

■ Changing the file name


The file name, saved in the CF memory card or USB-
memory, can be re-named from the receiver as de-
sired.

[F-4•� �] [F-5•REN/DEL] [F-7•WIDE] q D u r i n g s e t t i n g s ave s c r e e n d i s p l ay, p u s h


[F-1•DIR/FILE] to select tree view screen.
• Push and hold [F-1•DIR/FILE] for 1 sec. once or twice
to select the CF card or USB-Memory, when USB
memory is Inserted.
• Push [F-2•Y] or [F-3•Z] to select the desired folder.
• “DECODE,” “SETTING” and “VOICE” folders are availa-
ble as the default.
• After the folder is selected, push and hold [F-4•t u]
for 1 sec. to display content folder(s), if available.
[F-1•DIR/FILE] [F-2•Y] [F-3•Z] [EXIT/SET] w Push [F-1•DIR/FILE] to select file list screen.
e Push [F-2•Y] or [F-3•Z] to select the desired file.
 r Push [F-5•REN/DEL] momentarily to select the file
name edit condition.
t Push [ABC], [123] or [Symbol] to select the charac-
ter group, then rotate the main dial to select the
character.
• Push [123] or [Symbol] to toggle numerals and sym-
bols.
• [ABC] : A to Z (capital letters); [123]: 0 to 9 (numerals);
[Symbol]: ! # $ % & ‘ ` ^ + – = ( ) [ ] { } _ ~ @ can be se-
lected.
 • Push [F-1•t] to move the cursor left, push [F-2•u] to
move the cursor right, push [F-3•DEL] to delete a char-
acter and push [F-4•SPACE] to insert a space.
• Using the receiver’s keypad, [0]–[9], can also enter nu-
merals.
y Push [EXIT/SET] to set the file name.

11-20
SET MODE 11

■ File copying
[F-4•EDIT] [F-4•COPY] [F-7•WIDE] 
Memory channel contents, set mode settings, etc. in
CF card or USB-Memory can be copied between
memory devices for backup.

q D uring set mode menu screen indication, push


[F-7•CF/USB] to select CF/USB-Memory set menu
screen.
w Push [F-3•COPY] to select file copy screen.

[F-1•DIR/FILE] [F-6•SAVE] [EXIT/SET] Main dial • Select the original file


(Example Copying CF card to USB-Memory)
 z Push [F-1•DIR/FILE] to select tree view screen.
• Push and hold [F-1•DIR/FILE] for 1 sec. to select
the CF card, if USB-Memory is selected.
• Push [F-2•Y] or [F-3•Z] to select the desired folder.
• After the folder is selected, push and hold [F-4•t u]
for 1 sec. to display content folder(s), if available.
x Push [F-1•DIR/FILE] to select file list screen.

c Push [F-2•Y] or [F-3•Z] to select the desired
file.
v Push [F-4•COPY] to select the file.

• Saving location
z Push and hold [F-1•DIR/FILE] for 1 sec. to se-
lect the USB-Memory.
x S elect the desired directory or folder in the
USB-Memory.
• Push [F-4•t u] to select the upper directory.
• Push [F-2•Y] or [F-3•Z] to select folder in the same
directory.

• Push and hold [F-4•t u] for 1 sec. to select a folder
in the directory.
• Push [F-5•REN/DEL] to rename the folder.
• Push and hold [F-5•REN/DEL] for 1 sec. to delete
the folder.
• Push [F-6•MAKE] for 1 sec. to making a new folder
 c P ush [F-1•DIR/FILE] twice to select the file
name.
e Push [F-6•SAVE].
• After saving is completed, return to CF/USB-Memory
set menu automatically.

11-21
11 SET MODE

■ Deleting a file
 ECOMMENDATION! Deleting the setting file is ir-
R
reversible. Confirm the contents before deleting a
setting file!

 q D uring setting save screen display, push


[F-1•DIR/FILE] to select tree view screen.
• Push [F-2•Y] or [F-3•Z] to select the desired folder.
• “DECODE,” “SETTING” and “VOICE” folders are avail-
able as the default.
• After the folder is selected, push and hold [F-2•t u] for
1 sec. to display content folder(s), if available.
 w Push [F-1•DIR/FILE] to select file list screen.
e Push [F-2•Y] or [F-3•Z] to select the desired file to
be deleted.
r Push and hold [F-5•REN/DEL] for 1 sec.
• Confirmation screen appears.
t Push [F-6•OK] to delete.
• After the deleting, return to setting save screen auto-
matically.

■ Unmount an USB-Memory
 AUTION: When removing the USB-Memory, un-
C
mount operation is necessary. Unless otherwise in-
side data of USB-Memory may be dameged.

 q Push and hold [F-6•UNMOUNT] for 1 sec.


• Confirmation screen appears.
w Push [F-6•OK] to unmount the USB-Memory.
e After “ USB ” indication disappers, remove the USB-
Memory.

11-22
SET MODE 11

■ Formatting the CF card or USB-Memory


Saved data in the CF card or USB-Memory can be
erased.

IMPORTANT! Formatting erases all saved data in


the CF card/USB-Memory. Backing up your mem-
ory device on your PC is recommended.

q During CF/USB-Memory set menu display, push


and hold [F-4•FORMAT] for 1 sec.
• Selection screen appears.
w Push [F-6•CF] or [F-7•USB] to select CF card or
USB-Memory, respectively.
e Push [F-6•FAT] or [F-7•FAT32] to select the format
 type, FAT or FAT32, respectively.
• Confirmation screen appears.
r Push [F-6•OK] to format.
• Push [F-7•CANCEL] to cancel.
t Returns to CF card set menu indication automati-
cally.


 OTE: If no USB-Memory is inserted and [F-7•USB]


N
is selected as in step w, an error message appears.

11-23
11 SET MODE

■ Display set (Video) mode


This set mode is used to set the HSB (Hue, Saturation,
Brightness) color setting for video input or output, etc.
NOTE: “Display set mode” is described on page 11-8.

[F-1•Y] [F-2•Z] [F-4•DEF] q Push [DISPLAY] momentarily to turn the mini video
screen, if necessary.
w Push and hold [DISPLAY] for 1 sec. to select the
display set (Video) mode.
e Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired set
item.
r Set the desired condition using the main dial.
• Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select a default
condition or value.
[DISPLAY] [EXIT/SET] Main dial t Push [EXIT/SET] to exit from set mode.

 OTE: Video output from [DATA IN] is available an


N
NTSC system only.

TV Standard NTSC M
Selects the TV system of your local area from “NTSC  OTE:
N
M,” “PAL B/G,” “PAL I,” “PAL D” and “SECAM K.” • This setting is not available for USA versions.
• Default setting is different depending on versions.

VIDEO IN Contrast 53%


Adjusts the LCD contrast of the video signal from
[VIDEO IN] jack. Adjustable range is 0 (low contrast)
to 100% (high contrast) in 1% steps. (default: 50%)

VIDEO IN Bright 50%


Adjusts the LCD brightness of the video signal from
[VIDEO IN] jack. Adjustable range is 0 (dark) to 100%
(bright) in 1% steps. (default: 50%)

VIDEO IN Saturation 50%


Adjusts the saturation (vibrancy of the color) of the
video signal from [VIDEO IN] jack. Adjustable range
is 0 (shade of gray) to 100% (vivid color) in 1% steps.
(default: 50%)

VIDEO IN Hue (NTSC) 50%


Adjusts the hue (color type) of the video signal from  OTE: This setting is available when NTSC sys-
N
[VIDEO IN] jack. Adjustable range is 0 (red) to 100 tem signal is input from [VIDEO IN] connector.
(green) in 1 steps. (default: 50)

11-24
SET MODE 11

■ Display set (Video) mode (continued)


VIDEO IN Trimming ON
Trims the frame of the video signal from [VIDEO IN] OFF : Displays the entire area of video signal.
jack. (default: ON) ON : Cuts the frame area (each 4% width of upper,
bottom, left and right areas) and expands the
rest of area.

VIDEO IN Wide (Full) ON


Selects the wide screen capability ON and OFF.

 OTE: This setting is effective for the full screen


N
only.

VIDEO (DATA IN) Output VIDEO IN


Selects the output video signal from pin 2 of [DATA VIDEO IN : Outputs a video signal that is the same as
IN] socket. (default: VIDEO IN) the input from [VIDEO IN] jack.
LCD : Outputs a video signal that is the same as
the LCD.

VIDEO Out Horizontal Size 1


Adjusts the horizontal width of the output video signal
from pin 2 of [DATA IN] socket. Adjustable range is 1
(narrow) to 4 (wide) in 1 steps. (default: 1)

VIDEO Out Setup Level 7.5IRE


Selects the setup level of the output video signal from
pin 2 [DATA IN] socket. Selectable items are 0IRE
(JPN NTSC) or 7.5IRE (USA NTSC).

 OTE: Default setting is different depending on


N
versions.

VIDEO Out Saturation 80%


Adjusts the saturation (vibrancy of the color) of the
output video signal from pin 2 of [DATA IN] jack. Ad-
justable range is 0 (shade of gray) to 100% (vivid
color) in 1% steps. (default: 80%)

VIDEO Out Hue 50%


Adjusts the hue (color type) of the output video signal
from pin 2 of [DATA IN] jack. Adjustable range is 0
(red) to 100 (green) in 1 steps. (default: 50)

11-25
11 SET MODE

■ LCD set mode


This set mode is used to set the LCD contrast, bright-
ness and other settings for 2 condition of the dimmer
function ON and OFF.

[F-1•Y] [F-2•Z] [F-4•DEF] q Push [LCD SET] to select LCD set mode.
w Push [DIMMER] once or twice to select the dimmer
function ON or OFF.
e Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select the desired set
item.
r Set the desired condition using the main dial.
• Push and hold [F-4•DEF] for 1 sec. to select a default
condition or value.
• Push and hold [DIMMER] for 3 sec. to reset to a default
[DIMMER] [LCD SET] [EXIT/SET] Main dial condition or value for all items at the same time.
t Push [DIMMER] once to select the other dimmer
setting, and repeat steps e and r.
• Dimmer function OFF y Push [EXIT/SET] to exit from set mode.

• Dimmer function ON

Contrast (LCD) 75%


Adjusts the contrast of the LCD from 0 (low contrast) Default setting:
to 100% (high contrast) range in 1% steps. Dimmer function OFF : 75%
Dimmer function ON : 25%

Bright (LCD) 100%


Adjusts the brightness of the LCD from 0 (dark) to Default setting:
100% (bright) range in 1% steps. Dimmer function OFF : 100%
Dimmer function ON : 25%

LCD Unit Bright 50%


Adjusts the brightness of LCD unit from 0 (dark) to Default setting:
100% (bright) range in 1% steps. Dimmer function OFF : 50%
Dimmer function ON : 50%

Backlight (Switches) 50%


Adjusts the brightness of switch indicators from 1 Default setting:
(dark) to 100 (bright) range in 1 steps. Dimmer function OFF : 50%
Dimmer function ON : 25%

11-26
MAINTENANCE Section 12
■ Troubleshooting ������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 12-2
D Receiver power ��������������������������������������������������������������������������� 12-2
D Receiving ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������ 12-2
D Scanning ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 12-3
D Display ���������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 12-3
D Voice recorder ����������������������������������������������������������������������������� 12-3
D Format memory media ��������������������������������������������������������������� 12-3
■ Screen type selection ��������������������������������������������������������������������� 12-4
■ Main dial brake adjustment ������������������������������������������������������������ 12-4
■ Frequency calibration (approximate) ���������������������������������������������� 12-5
■ Opening the receiver’s case ����������������������������������������������������������� 12-6
■ Opening the shield case ����������������������������������������������������������������� 12-6
■ UT-122 installation �������������������������������������������������������������������������� 12-7
■ Clock backup battery replacement ������������������������������������������������� 12-7
■ Fuse replacement ��������������������������������������������������������������������������� 12-8
D AC power input fuse ������������������������������������������������������������������� 12-8
D DC output fuse ��������������������������������������������������������������������������� 12-8
■ Resetting the CPU �������������������������������������������������������������������������� 12-9
■ Screen Saver Function ������������������������������������������������������������������� 12-9

12-1
12 MAINTENANCE

■ Troubleshooting
The following chart is designed to help you correct
problems which are not equipment malfunctions.
If you are unable to locate the cause of a problem or
solve it through the use of this chart, contact you
nearest Icom Dealer or Service Center.

D Receiver power
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.
Power does not come on • Power cable is improperly connected. • Re-connect the AC power cable correctly. —
when the [POWER] switch • DC-DC power plug is improperly connected. • Re-connect the DC-DC power plug correctly. —
is pushed. • The internal power supply is turned OFF. • Turn the internal power supply ON. p. 3-2
• The fuse is blown. • Check for the cause, then replace the fuse. p.12-8

D Receiving
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.
No sounds come out from • Volume level is too low. • Rotate [AF] clockwise to obtain a suitable lis- p. 3-8
the speaker. tening level.
• The squelch is closed. • Turn [SQL] to 10 o’clock position to open the p. 3-8
squelch.
• The RF gain is too decreases sensitivity. • Rotate [RF GAIN] clockwise to obtain an p. 3-8
enough sensitivity.
Sensitivity is too low, and • The antenna is not connected properly. • Re-connect the antenna. —
only strong signals are • The attenuator is activated. • Push [ATT] several times to select “ATT OFF.” p. 5-9
audible. • A different antenna for HF band is selected. • Push [ANT] several times to select the correct p. 9-3
antenna for the HF band.
Received audio is unclear • Wrong operating mode is selected. • Select a suitable operating mode. p. 3-7
or distorted. • PBT function is activated. • Push [PBT CLR] for 1 sec. to reset the function. p. 5-11
• Noise blanker is turned ON when receiving a • Push [NB] to turn the noise blanker OFF. p. 5-15
strong signal.
• Preamp is activated. • Push [P.AMP] once or twice to turn the func- p. 5-9
tion OFF.
• The noise reduction is activated and the [NR] • Set the [NR] control for maximum readability. p. 5-16
control is too far clockwise.
The [ANT] switch does not • The selected frequency is above 30 MHz. • Select a frequency below 30 MHz. pgs. 3-4,
function 9-3
[AFC] cannot be turned • The operating mode is not set in FM or WFM • Select FM or WFM mode to activate AFC. pgs. 3-7,
ON. mode. 5-17
[AUTOTUNE](AFC) can- • The operating mode is set in FM, WFM, FSK • Select AM, SSB or CW mode to activate pgs. 3-7,
not be turned ON. or P25 mode. AUTOTUNE. 5-17
[VSC] cannot be turned • The operating mode is set in CW, FSK or P25 • Select FM, WFM, AM or SSB mode to activate pgs. 3-7,
ON. mode. VSC. 8-3
[ANF] cannot be turned • The operating mode is set in CW, FSK or P25 • Select FM, WFM, AM or SSB mode to activate pgs. 3-7,
ON. mode. ANF. 5-16
[NOTCH1]/[NOTCH2] can- • The operating mode is set in FM, WFM or • Select AM, SSB, CW and FSK mode to activate pgs. 3-7,
not be turned ON. P25 mode. MN1/MN2. 5-16
The filter width cannot be • The operating mode is set in WFM or P25 • Select FM, AM, SSB, CW and FSK mode. pgs. 3-7,
changed. mode. 5-12
A synthesized voice is • “Speech Level” in the level set mode is too low • Set “Speech Level” to enough level in the set p. 11-6
not emitted when pushing mode.
[SPCH]. • “SPEECH Mix” in the others set mode is OFF. • Set “SPEECH Mix” to All or Operation in the p. 11-11
set mode.
No sounds come out or • Either the audio tone controls is too decreases • Rotate [BASS] or [TREBLE] clockwise to obtain p. 3-9
output level is too low from position an enough audio output.
[S/P DIF OUT], [ACC],
[LINE OUT], [REC OUT].

12-2
MAINTENANCE 12

D Scanning
PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.
Programmed scan does • Squelch is open. • Readjust the [SQL] threshold. pgs. 3-8,
not stop. 8-3
Scan does not start.
(Programmed scan) • The same frequencies have been programmed • Program different frequencies in scan edge p. 8-6
in scan edge memory channels PxA and PxB. memory channel PxA and PxB.
(Memory scan) • 2 or more memory channels have not been • Program more than 2 memory channels. pgs. 7-4,
programmed. 8-11
(Select memory scan) • 2 or more memory channels have not been • Designate more than 2 memory channels as p. 8-12
designated as select channels. select channels for the scan.
(Mode select memory scan) • 2 or more memory channels with desired • Program more than 2 memory channels with pgs. 7-4,
mode have not been programmed. desired operating mode. 8-14
(∂F scan) • The center frequency for ∂F scan does not • Program the center frequency for ∂F scan. p. 8-8
programmed.
(Auto memory write scan) • Auto write bank is full. • Clear the memory channels of auto write pgs. 7-7,
bank. 8-4

D Display

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.


No indication appears on • The LCD settings are wrong in the LCD set • Set LCD settings properly in the set mode. p. 11-26
the display. mode.
• The panel lock with display sleep function is • Push [PANEL LOCK] to turn the function OFF. p. 9-2
activated.
The displayed frequency • The dial lock function is activated. • Push [LOCK] to turn the function OFF. p. 9-2
does not change properly. • The remote control operation is active. • Push [LOCAL] to cancel the remote control p. 1-2
operation.
The key operation on the • The panel lock function is activated. • Push [PANEL LOCK] to turn the function OFF. p. 9-2
front panel does not func- • The remote control operation is active. • Push [LOCAL] to cancel the remote control p. 1-2
tion. operation.

D Voice recorder

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.


The voice recorder cannot • The selected memory media is full. • Select a different memory media or clear the pgs. 6-4,
record. unnecessary files. 11-22
• 512 files already exist in folder. • Clear the unnecessary files. p. 11-22
• The maximum file name (V∗∗∗∗999.wav) • Delate the file (V∗∗∗∗999.wav), or change the pgs. 6-4,
exists in folder. file name. 11-20,
(Example: V0424 999.wav, V1116 999.wav) 11-22
The voice recorder stops • The recording memory media is full. • Select a different memory media or clear the p. 6-4
recording. unnecessary files.
• The recording file size is at maximum (2 GB). • Select a lower sound quality for long duration p. 6-6
recording.

D Format memory media

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE SOLUTION REF.


Format error appears • The inserted memory media capacity is small- • Insert a memory media larger than 64 MB or p. 11-23
when formatting in FAT32 er than 64 MB. select the FAT format.
Format error appears • The inserted memory media capacity is larger • Insert a memory media smaller than 2 GB or p. 11-23
when formatting in FAT than 2 GB. select the FAT32 format.

12-3
12 MAINTENANCE

■ Screen type selection


2 types of screen images are available in the IC-
• Screen image example— type A (default) R9500.

q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close multifunc-


tion screen, if necessary.
w Push [F-7•SET] to select set mode menu screen.
e Push [F-3•DISP] to enter the display set mode.
r Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to select “Display Type”
item.
t Rotate the main dial to select the desired screen
image.
• Screen image is selectable from A and B.
y Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit from the display set
mode.

(Blue display)

• Screen image example— type B


(Black display)

■ Main dial brake adjustment


The tension of the main dial may be adjusted to suit
your preference.

The brake adjustment is located on the bottom side of


[MAIN DIAL]
the front panel. See the figure at left.

Slide the brake adjustment to a comfortable tension


level while turning the dial continuously and evenly in
one direction.

Brake
adjustment Light

Heavy

12-4
MAINTENANCE 12

■ Frequency calibration (approximate)


 very accurate frequency counter is required to cali-
A
brate the frequency of the receiver. However, a rough
check may be performed by receiving radio station
WWV, WWVH, or other standard frequency signals.

 AUTION: The IC-R9500 has been thoroughly ad-


C
justed and tested at the factory before being
shipped. You should not have to re-calibrate it.

[F-2•ACC]/[F-2•Z] [F-4•DEF] [F-7•SET] q Push [SSB] to select USB mode.


w Push and hold [PBT CLEAR] for 1 sec. to clear the
PBT setting.
e Set the frequency to the standard frequency sta-
tion minus 1 kHz.
• When receiving WWV or WWVH (at 15.00000 MHz) as
a standard frequency, set the operating frequency for
14.99900 MHz.
• Other standard frequencies can be used.
r Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-
[F-1•Y] [F-5•OTHERS] [EXIT/SET] Main dial function screen, if necessary.
t Push [F-7•SET] to select set mode menu screen.
• Calibration marker item y Push [F-5•OTHERS] to enter the others set mode.
u Push [F-1•Y] several times to select the “Calibra-
tion Marker” item.
i Rotate the main dial clockwise to turn the calibra-
tion marker ON.
o Push [EXIT/SET] once to return to set mode menu
screen.
!0 Push [F-2•ACC] to enter accessory set mode.
!1 Push [F-2•Z] several times to select the “REF Ad-
just” item.
!2 Rotate the main dial to adjust for a zero beat with
the received standard signal as shown at left.
• Zero beat means that two signals are exactly the same
frequency, resulting in a single tone being emitted.
• REF Adjust item !3 Turn the calibration marker OFF in the others set
mode.
!4 Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit set mode.

12-5
12 MAINTENANCE

■ Opening the receiver’s case


Follow the case opening procedures shown here
e when you want to install the optional unit UT-122, or
replace the clock battery or internal fuse.

 AUTION: DISCONNECT the AC power cable


C
from the receiver before performing any work on
the receiver. Otherwise, there is danger of electric
shock and/or equipment damage.

C AUTION: The receiver weighs approx. 20 kg


(44 lb). Always have two people available to lift or
w turn over the receiver.

q Remove the 6 screws from the rack mounting han-


dles. And remove the rack mounting handles and
side plates.
w R emove the 10 screws from the rear of the re-
ceiver and remove the rear cover.
q
e Remove the 8 screws from the top of the receiver
and the 6 screws from the sides, then lift up the top
cover.

 AUTION: NEVER HOLD THE MAIN DIAL OR


C
ANY OTHER KNOBS when lifting the receiver.
This may damage the receiver.

■ Opening the shield case


Follow the case opening procedures shown here
when you want to replace the internal fuse or optional
UT-122 installation.

q Remove the 9 screws from the shield cover of the


receiver’s top side.
w Lift up the shield cover.

12-6
MAINTENANCE 12

■ UT-122 installation
The optional UT-122 digital unit provides P25 (digital)
mode operation.

 ARNING! DISCONNECT the AC power cable


W
from the AC outlet before removing the receiver’s
cover.

q Remove the top cover and inside cover as shown


at left page.
w Connect the UT-122 as shown left.
• Remove the protective paper from the UT-122 in ad-
vance.
e Return the inside cover and top cover and screws
to the original position.

■ Clock backup battery replacement


The IC-R9500 has a lithium backup battery (CR2032)
inside for clock and timer functions. The usual life of
the backup battery is approximately 2 years.

When the backup battery is drained, the receiver re-


ceives normally but cannot retain the current time.

 ARNING! DISCONNECT the AC power cable


W
from the AC outlet before removing the receiver’s
cover.

q Remove the top cover as shown at left page.


w Replace the clock backup battery, located on the
front panel as illustrated at left.
• Make sure the battery polarity is correct.
e Return the top cover to the original position.
r Set the date and time in time set mode. (p. 10-2)

For Users in California (U.S.A.)


This CR-2032 Lithium Battery contains Perchlorate
Material—special handling may apply.
See http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

12-7
12 MAINTENANCE

■ Fuse replacement
IC-R9500 has two fuses for receiver protection.
AC power input : 4 A (for 100/120 V AC versions)
2 A (for 230/240 V AC versions)
DC output jack : 1 A
If the fuse blows or the receiver stops functioning, find
the sources of the problem, if possible, and replace
the damaged fuse with a new fuse of the same rating.

 ARNING! DISCONNECT the AC power cable


W
from the AC outlet before removing the receiver’s
cover. This can prevent shock to the user or dam-
age to the receiver.

D AC power input fuse


The AC power input fuse is held in the [FUSE] holder.

q Unscrew the [FUSE] holder using a standard screw


driver.
w Replace the open fuse with a new, properly rated
one as shown at left.

D DC output fuse


When no external DC output is available from [EXT
DC] and ACC connector, the internal fuse may be
open. Replace the fuse in this case.

q Remove the top cover and shield case as shown at


page 12-6.
w Replace the open fuse with a new, properly rated
one (FGB 1 A) as shown at left.
e Replace the shield case and top cover.

12-8
MAINTENANCE 12

■ Resetting the CPU


[POWER] [CE] [M-CL] q Turn the main power switch on the rear panel ON.
• Make sure the receiver power is still OFF.
w While pushing and holding [CE] and [M-CL], push
[POWER] to turn power ON.
• The internal CPU is reset.
• The CPU start-up takes approx. 5 sec.
• The receiver displays its initial VFO frequencies when
resetting is complete.
e Correct the set mode settings after resetting, if de-
sired.

NOTE: Resetting CLEARS all programmed con-


tents in memory channels and returns programmed
values in set mode to default values.

iR9500
ALL CLEAR

■ Screen saver function


The IC-R9500 has a screen saver function to protect
the LCD from the “burn-in” effect.

[F-3•DISP] [F-4•DEF] [F-7•SET]/[F-7•WIDE] q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multi-


function screen, if necessary.
w Push [F-7•SET] to select set mode menu screen.
e Push [F-3•DISP] to enter the display set mode.
r Push [F-1•Y]/[F-2•Z] several times to select the
“Screen Saver Function” item.
t Rotate main dial to select the desired time period
for the screen saver activation from 15, 30, 60 min.
and OFF.
• Deactivate the screen saver with “OFF” selection.
[F-1•Y] [F-2•Z] [F-5•PREVIEW] [EXIT/SET] Main dial
• Push and hold [F-5•PREVIEW] to display the indication
for your reference.
y Push [EXIT/SET] twice to exit the set mode.

12-9
CONTROL COMMAND Section 13
■ Remote interface (CI-V) information . .............................................. 13-2
D CI-V connection example ............................................................ 13-2
D Data format . ................................................................................ 13-2
D Command table �������������������������������������������������������������������������� 13-3
D To send/read memory contents ������������������������������������������������ 13-10
D Codes for memory name, bank name, opening message,
and clock 2 name contents ������������������������������������������������������� 13-10
D Offset frequency setting ������������������������������������������������������������ 13-10
D Tone squelch frequency setting ������������������������������������������������ 13-10
D DTCS squelch code setting ������������������������������������������������������ 13-10
D NAC squelch code setting �������������������������������������������������������� 13-11
D Selective squelch code settings ����������������������������������������������� 13-11
D Color setting ���������������������������������������������������������������������������� 13-11
D Data mode with filter width setting ������������������������������������������� 13-11

13-1
13 CONTROL COMMAND

■ Remote interface (CI-V) information


D CI-V connection example
 he receiver can be connected through an optional
T
9–15 V DC CT-17 ci-v level converter to a PC equipped with an
IC-R9500 RS-232C port. The Icom Communications Interface-V
(CI-V) controls the receiver.

Up to 4 Icom CI-V transceivers or receivers can be


connected to a PC equipped with an RS-232C port.
See p. 11-14 for configuring the CI-V using set mode.
PC

mini-plug cable

D Data format
The CI-V system uses the following data formats. Data
formats differ according to command numbers. A data
area or sub command is added for some commands.
Controller to IC-R9500 OK message to controller
q w e r t y u

FE FE 72H E0 Cn Sc Data area FD FE FE E0 72H FB FD


Sub command number
(see the command table)

(see command table)

frequency or memory

NG code OK code
(fixed)
Command number

BCD code data for

End of message

End of message
default address

default address

default address

default address
number entry
Controller’s

Controller’s
code (fixed)

code (fixed)
code (fixed)

code (fixed)
Receiver’s

Receiver’s
Preamble

Preamble

(fixed)

FE FE E0 72H Cn Sc Data area FD FE FE E0 72H FA FD


q w e r t y u
IC-R9500 to controller NG message to controller

13-2
CONTROL COMMAND 13

D Command table
Command Sub command Description Command Sub command Description
00 — Send frequency data 0E D1 Set scan resume ON
01 Same as Send mode data (Close Timer)
command 06 D3 Set scan resume ON
(Close and Delay)
02 — Read upper/lower frequencies for
10 Turn duplex OFF. (Simplex)
selected band
11 Turn duplex ON. (DUP–)
03 — Read operating frequency 12 Turn duplex ON. (DUP+)
04 — Read operating mode 10 00 Select 1 Hz tuning step
05 — Set operating frequency 01 Select 10 Hz tuning step
02 Select 100 Hz tuning step
06 00 Select LSB
03 Select 1 kHz tuning step
01 Select USB
04 Select 2.5 kHz tuning step
02 Select AM
05 Select 5 kHz tuning step
03 Select CW
06 Select 6.25 kHz tuning step
04 Select FSK
07 Select 9 kHz tuning step
05 Select FM
08 Select 10 kHz tuning step
07 Select CW-R
09 Select 12.5 kHz tuning step
08 Select FSK-R
10 Select 20 kHz tuning step
11 Select S-AM(D)
11 Select 25 kHz tuning step
14 Select S-AM(L)
12 Select 100 kHz tuning step
15 Select S-AM(U)
13 Select 1 MHz tuning step
16 Select P25
14 Select Prog tuning step
07 — Select (Last selected) VFO mode
11 — Select/read attenuator (00=OFF;
08 — Select memory mode 06=6 dB; 10=10 dB; 12=12 dB;
0–1219* Select memory channel 18=18 dB; 20=20 dB; 24=24 dB;
*0–999, 1000–1099 (A00–A99), 30=30 dB)
1100–1199 (S00–S99), 1200–
12 00 Select/read the antenna below
1219 (P0A–P9A)
01 30 MHz. (00=HF ANT1,
0–12* Select memory bank
02 01=HF ANT2, 02=HF ANT3)
*0–9, 10 (Bank-A), 11 (Bank-S),
12 (Bank-P) 13 00 Announce with voice synthesizer
01 (00=all data; 01=frequency and
09 — Memory write
02 S-meter level; 02=receive mode)
0A — Memory to VFO
14 01 + Level data [AF] level setting
0B — Memory clear (0=max. CCW to 255=max. CW)
0C — Read offset frequency 02 + Level data [RF] level setting
(see p. 13-10 for details) (0=max. CCW to 255=11 o’clock)
0D — Set offset frequency 03 + Level data [SQL] level setting
(see p. 13-10 for details) (0=11 o’clock to 255=max. CW)
06 + Level data [NR] level setting
0E 00 Scan stop
(0=min. to 255=max.)
01 Programmed scan (Prog 0)/
07 + Level data Left [TWIN PBT] setting or IF shift
memory scan start
setting (0=max. CCW, 128=center,
02 Programmed scan (Prog 0) start
255=max. CW)
03 ∂F scan start
08 + Level data Right [TWIN PBT] setting
04 Auto memory write scan start
(0=max. CCW, 128=center,
12 Fine programmed scan start
255=max. CW)
13 Fine ∂F scan start
09 + Level data [CW PITCH] setting
22 Memory scan start
(0=300 Hz, 128=600 Hz,
23 Select memory scan start
255=900 Hz; 5 Hz steps)
24 Mode select memory scan start
0D + Level data [NOTCH1] setting
42 Priority scan (Prio 0) start
(0=low freq. to 255=high freq.)
A0 Set ∂F scan Fixed frequency ON
11 + Level data [AGC] control setting (0=max.
AA Set ∂F scan Fixed frequency OFF
CCW to 255=max. CW)
A1–A7 Set ∂F scan span (A1=±5 kHz;
12 + Level data [NB] control setting
A2=±10 kHz; A3=±20 kHz;
(0=max. CCW to 255=max. CW)
A4=±50 kHz; A5=±100 kHz;
18 + Level data [CONTRAST] setting (0=max.
A6=±500 kHz; A7=±1 MHz)
CCW to 255=max. CW)
B0 Set as non-select channel
19 + Level data [BRIGHT] setting
B1 Set as select channel
(0=max. CCW to 255=max. CW)
(1–9=★(SEL)1–9; when no data
1A + Level data [NOTCH2] setting
command is specified, the previous-
(0=low freq. to 255=high freq.)
ly set number or “★1” is selected)
1B + Level data [BASS] setting
B2 Set the number for select memory
(0=max. CCW to 255=max. CW)
scan (0=ALL; 1–9=★(SEL)1–9
1C + Level data [TREBLE] setting
D0 Set scan resume OFF
(0=max. CCW to 255=max. CW)

13-3
13 CONTROL COMMAND

D Command table (continued)


Command Sub command Description Command Sub command Description
14 1D + Level data [SCAN SPEED] setting 1A 050011 Send/read FSK Tone (Bass) level
(0=max. CCW to 255=max. CW) (0=–15 to 30=+15)
1E + Level data [SCAN DELAY] setting 050012 Send/read FSK Tone (Treble)
(0=max. CCW to 255=max. CW) level (0=–15 to 30=+15)
15 01 Read squelch status 050013 Send/read De-emphasis (FM 50k)
02 Read signal (S-meter) level (0=OFF, 1=ON)
03+Sign+M-type Read signal (dB meter) level 050014 Send/read De-emphasis (FM 15k)
Sign: 0/1=+/–, M-type 0/1/2=dBµ, (0=OFF, 1=ON)
dBµ[EMF], dBm 050015 Send/read De-emphasis (FM 7k)
04 Read center meter level (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050016 Send/read AF high-cut filter (FM
16 02 Preamp (0=OFF; 1=preamp 1;
50k) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
2=preamp 2)
050017 Send/read AF high-cut filter (FM
12 AGC selection (0=OFF; 1=Fast;
15k) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
2=Mid; 3=Slow)
050018 Send/read AF high-cut filter (FM
22 Noise blanker
7k) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
(0=OFF, 1=NB1, 2=NB2)
050019 Send/read AF high-cut filter
32 Audio peak filter (APF type is
(WFM) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
SHARP; 0=OFF, 1=320 Hz,
050020 Send/read AF high-cut filter (AM)
2=160 Hz, 3=80 Hz), (APF type is
(0=OFF, 1=ON)
SOFT; 0=OFF, 1=WIDE, 2=MID,
050021 Send/read AF high-cut filter (SSB)
3=NAR)
(0=OFF, 1=ON)
40 Noise reduction (0=OFF; 1=ON)
050022 Send/read AF high-cut filter (CW)
41 Auto notch (0=OFF; 1=ON)
(0=OFF, 1=ON)
43 Tone squelch (0=OFF; 1=ON)
050023 Send/read AF high-cut filter (FSK)
48 Manual notch1 (0=OFF; 1=ON)
(0=OFF, 1=ON)
4A AFC (0=OFF; 1=ON)
050024 Send/read AF high-cut filter (P25)
4B DTCS squelch (0=OFF; 1=ON)
(0=OFF, 1=ON)
4C VSC (0=OFF; 1=ON)
050025 Send/read speech level
4D Manual AGC (0=OFF; 1=ON)
(0=0% to 255=100%)
4F Twin peak filter (0=OFF; 1=ON)
050026 Send/read beep gain
50 Dial lock (0=OFF; 1=ON)
(0=0% to 255=100%)
51 Manual notch2 (0=OFF; 1=ON)
050027 Send/read beep gain limit
52 P25 Digital squelch
(0=OFF, 1=ON)
(0=OFF; 1=NAC, 2=SEL)
050028 Send/read headphones output
19 00 Read the receiver information ratio (0=0.60 to 255=1.40)
1A 00 Send/read memory contents (see 050029 Send/read SPEECH OUTPUT
p. 13-10 for details) level (0=0% to 255=100%)
03 Send/read the selected filter width 050030 Send/read S/P DIF output level
(AM: 0=200 Hz to 49=10 kHz; (0=0% to 255=100%)
SSB, CW: 0=50 Hz to 40=3600 Hz; 050031 Send/read REC REMOTE output
FSK: 0=50 Hz to 31=2700 Hz) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
04 Send/read the selected AGC time 050032 Send/read external meter output
constant (AM: 0=OFF, 1=0.3 sec. selection
to 13=8.0 sec., SSB, CW, FSK: (0=Signal, 1=Signal+SQL)
0=OFF, 1=0.1 sec. to 13=6.0 sec.) 050033 Send/read external meter output
level
050001 Send/read FM Tone (Bass) level
(0=0% to 255=100%)
(0=–15 to 30=+15)
050034 Send/read reference signal in/out
050002 Send/read FM Tone (Treble) level
setting (0=IN, 1=OFF, 2=OUT)
(0=–15 to 30=+15)
050035 Send/read reference signal fre-
050003 Send/read WFM Tone (Bass) level
quency setting
(0=–15 to 30=+15)
(0=0% to 255=100%)
050004 Send/read WFM Tone (Treble)
050036 Send/read screen image type
level (0=–15 to 30=+15)
(0=A, 1=B)
050005 Send/read AM Tone (Bass) level
050037 Send/read signal meter type (0=S,
(0=–15 to 30=+15)
1=dBµ, 2=dBµ[EMF], 3=dBm
050006 Send/read AM Tone (Treble) level
050038 Send/read meter peak hold set
(0=–15 to 30=+15)
(0=OFF, 1=ON)
050007 Send/read SSB Tone (Bass) level
050039 Send/read memory name indica-
(0=–15 to 30=+15)
tion setting (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050008 Send/read SSB Tone (Treble)
050040 Send/read audio peak filter width
level (0=–15 to 30=+15)
pop-up indication setting
050009 Send/read CW Tone (Bass) level
(0=OFF, 1=ON)
(0=–15 to 30=+15)
050041 Send/read manual notch width
050010 Send/read CW Tone (Treble) level
pop-up indication setting
(0=–15 to 30=+15)
(0=OFF, 1=ON)

13-4
CONTROL COMMAND 13

D Command table (continued)


Command Sub command Description Command Sub command Description
1A
050042 Send/read P25 received ID pop- 1A
050072 Send/read CI-V transceive set
up indication setting (0=OFF, 1=ON)
(0=OFF, 1=ON(Dec), 2=ON(Hex)) 050073 Send/read RS-232C function
050043 Send/read screen saver set (0=CI-V, 1=Decode)
(0=OFF, 1=15 min., 2=30 min., 050074 Send/read RS-232C decode
3=60 min.) speed (0=300, 1=1200, 2=4800,
050044 Send/read output signal setting for 3=9600, 4=19200)
external display (0=OFF, 1=ON) 050075 Send/read keyboard type
050045 Send/read external display syn- (00=English, 01=Japanese,
chronous pulse level setting 02=United Kingdom, 03=French,
(0=L, 1=H) 04=French (Canadian),
050046 Send/read opening message indi- 05=German, 06=Portuguese,
cation (0=OFF, 1=ON) 07=Portuguese (Brazilian),
050047 Send/read opening message con- 08=Spanish, 09=Spanish (Latin
tents (see p. 13-10 for details) American), 10=Italian)
050048 Send/read date 050076 Send/read keyboard repeat delay
(20000101=1st Jan. 2000 to (10=100 msec. to 100=1000 msec.)
20991231=31st Dec. 2099) 050077 Send/read keyboard repeat speed
050049 Send/read time (0=2.0 cps to 31=30.0 cps)
(0000=00:00 to 2359=23:59) 050078 Send/read IP address set
050050 Send/read clock 2 function (0000000000000001=0.0.0.1 to 025
(0=OFF, 1=ON) 5025502550254=255.255.255.254)
050051 Send/read offset time for 050079 Send/read subnet mask
clock 2 (240001=–24:00 to (1=128.0.0.0 to
240000=+24:00) 30=255.255.255.252)
050052 Send/read clock 2 name 050080 Send/read TV type
(Up to 3-character; see p. 13-10) (0=NTSC M, 1=PAL B/G, 2=PAL  I,
050053 Send/read calibration marker 3=PAL D, 4=SECAM K)
(0=OFF, 1=ON) 050081 Send/read the LCD contrast of the
050054 Send/read confirmation beep video signal from [VIDEO IN]
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=0% to 255=100%)
050055 Send/read beep audio frequency 050082 Send/read the LCD brightness of
(50=500 Hz to 200=2000 Hz) the video signal from [VIDEO IN]
050056 Send/read panel lock function set (0=0% to 255=100%)
(0=ALL, 1=KEY) 050083 Send/read the saturation of the
050057 Send/read speech language video signal from [VIDEO IN]
(0=English, 1=Japanese) (0=0% to 255=100%)
050058 Send/read speech speed 050084 Send/read the hue of the video
(0=Slow, 1=Fast) signal from [VIDEO IN]
050059 Send/read S-level speech (0=0% to 255=100%)
(0=OFF, 1=ON) 050085 Send/read the frame trimming of
050060 Send/read speech with a mode the video signal from [VIDEO IN].
switch operation (0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050061 Send/read REC Speech set 050086 Send/read the wide screen set.
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050062 Send/read Speech Mix function 050087 Send/read the output video signal
set (0=OFF, 1=Operation, 2=All) from [DATA IN]
050063 Send/read main dial auto TS (0=VIDEO IN, 1=LCD)
(0=OFF, 1=Low, 2=High) 050088 Send/read the width of the output
050064 Send/read main dial click function video signal from [DATA IN]
mode set (0=Manual, 1=Auto) (0=1 (narrow) to 3=4 (wide))
050065 Send/read main dial click function set 050089 Send/read setup of the output
(When above is Manual; 0=OFF, video signal from [DATA IN]
1=ON or Auto; 0=OFF, 1=Auto) (0=0IRE (JPN NTSC), 1=7.5IRE
050066 Send/read main dial click (set (USA NTSC))
mode, etc) function 050090 Send/read output saturation level
(0=OFF, 1=ON) from [DATA IN]
050067 Send/read main dial operation (0=0% to 255=100%)
during scan (0=OFF, 1=Up/Down) 050091 Send/read output hue level from
050068 Send/read AFC limit set [DATA IN]. (0=0% to 255=100%)
(0=OFF, 1=ON) 050092 Send/read the LCD contrast with
050069 Send/read SSB/CW synchronous dimmer OFF condition
tuning function (0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=0% to 255=100%)
050070 Send/read CW normal side set 050093 Send/read the LCD brightness
(0=LSB, 1=USB) with dimmer OFF condition
050071 Send/read APF type (0=0% to 255=100%)
(0=SHARP, 1=SOFT)

13-5
13 CONTROL COMMAND

D Command table (continued)


Command Sub command Description Command Sub command Description
1A
050094 Send/read the LCD unit brightness 1A
050118 Send/read memory bank name
with dimmer OFF condition (Bank-2) (see p. 13-10 for details)
(0=0% to 255=100%) 050119 Send/read memory bank name
050095 Send/read the key backlight with (Bank-3) (see p. 13-10 for details)
dimmer OFF condition 050120 Send/read memory bank name
(0=0% to 255=100%) (Bank-4) (see p. 13-10 for details)
050096 Send/read the LCD contrast with 050121 Send/read memory bank name
dimmer ON condition (Bank-5) (see p. 13-10 for details)
(0=0% to 255=100%) 050122 Send/read memory bank name
050097 Send/read the LCD brightness (Bank-6) (see p. 13-10 for details)
with dimmer ON condition 050123 Send/read memory bank name
(0=0% to 255=100%) (Bank-7) (see p. 13-10 for details)
050098 Send/read the LCD unit brightness 050124 Send/read memory bank name
with dimmer ON condition (Bank-8) (see p. 13-10 for details)
(0=0% to 255=100%) 050125 Send/read memory bank name
050099 Send/read the key backlight with (Bank-9) (see p. 13-10 for details)
dimmer ON condition 050126 Send/read memory bank name
(0=0% to 255=100%) (Bank-A) (see p. 13-10 for details)
050100 Send/read scope max. hold 050127 Send/read memory bank name
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (Bank-S) (see p. 13-10 for details)
050101 Send/read scope center frequen- 050128 Set/read FFT scope averaging set
cy set (0=Filter center, 1=Carrier for FSK decoder
point center, 2=Carrier point (0=OFF, 1=2, 2=3, 3=4)
center (Abs. Freq.)) 050129 Set/read FFT scope waveform
050102 Send/read waveform color for color set for FSK decoder
receiving signal (see p. 13-11 for details)
(see p. 13-11 for details) 050130 Send/read FSK decode USOS
050103 Send/read waveform color for max. (0=OFF, 1=ON)
hold 050131 Send/read FSK decode new line
(see p. 13-11 for details) code
050104 Send/read marker color for receiv- (0=CR,LF,CR+LF, 1=CR+LF)
ing signal 050132 Send/read clock selection for time
(see p. 13-11 for details) stamp (0=Local time, 1=Clock 2)
050105 Send/read marker color for max. 050133 Send/read frequency stamp
hold (see p. 13-11 for details) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050106 Send/read scope peak excursion 050134 Send/read FSK received text font
(0=0 dB to 80=80 dB) color (see p. 13-11 for details)
050107 Send/read scope peak threshold 050135 Send/read time stamp text font
(0=–100 dB to 100=0 dB) color (see p. 13-11 for details)
050108 Send/read voice recorder’s short 050136 Send/read skip scan set
play time (3=3 sec. to 10=10 sec.) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050109 Send/read voice recorder short 050137 Send/read auto memory scan
record time memory clear set (0=OFF,
(5=5 sec. to 30=30 sec.) 1=[AUTO] Long Push, 2=ON)
050110 Send/read voice recorder’s record- 050138 Send/read auto scan screen set
ing quality when scan start (0=OFF, 1=ON)
(0=SQ1 (8 kHz), 1=SQ2 (12 kHz), 050139 Send/read NB1 depth
2=HQ1 (16 kHz) 3=HQ2(24 kHz) (0=1 to 9=10)
4=SHQ (48 kHz)) 050140 Send/read NB1 width
050111 Send/read REC remote set (0=0 to 255=100)
(0=OFF, 1=ON) 050141 Send/read NB2 depth
050112 Send/read SPEECH Mix set (0=1 to 9=10)
(0=OFF, 1=Operation, 2=All) 050142 Send/read NB2 width
050113 Send/read speech mix level (0=0 to 255=100)
(0=0% (Receive audio only) to 050143 Send/read TS (1 Hz) as selectable
255=100% (Speech audio only)) tuning step for FM
050114 Send/read memory bank limit set (0=OFF, 1=ON)
for memory channel selection 050144 Send/read TS (10 Hz) as selecta-
(0=OFF, 1=ON) ble tuning step for FM
050115 Send/read memory bank limit set (0=OFF, 1=ON)
for memory scan (0=OFF, 1=ON) 050145 Send/read TS (100 Hz) as selecta-
050116 Send/read memory bank name ble tuning step for FM
(Bank-0) (see p. 13-10 for details) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050117 Send/read memory bank name 050146 Send/read TS (1 kHz) as selecta-
(Bank-1) (see p. 13-10 for details) ble tuning step for FM
(0=OFF, 1=ON)

13-6
CONTROL COMMAND 13

D Command table (continued)


Command Sub command Description Command Sub command Description
1A
050147 Send/read TS (2.5 kHz) as selecta- 1A
050169 Send/read TS (25 kHz) as selecta-
ble tuning step for FM ble tuning step for WFM
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050148 Send/read TS (5 Hz) as selectable 050170 Send/read TS (100 kHz) as
tuning step for FM selectable tuning step for WFM
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050149 Send/read TS (6.25 kHz) as 050171 Send/read TS (1 MHz) as selecta-
selectable tuning step for FM ble tuning step for WFM
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050150 Send/read TS (9 kHz) as selecta- 050172 Send/read TS (PROG) as selecta-
ble tuning step for FM ble tuning step for WFM
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050151 Send/read TS (10 kHz) as selecta- 050173 Send/read TS (1 Hz) as selectable
ble tuning step for FM tuning step for AM
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050152 Send/read TS (12.5 kHz) as 050174 Send/read TS (10 Hz) as selecta-
selectable tuning step for FM ble tuning step for AM
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050153 Send/read TS (20 kHz) as selecta- 050175 Send/read TS (100 Hz) as selecta-
ble tuning step for FM ble tuning step for AM
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050154 Send/read TS (25 kHz) as selecta- 050176 Send/read TS (1 kHz) as selecta-
ble tuning step for FM ble tuning step for AM
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050155 Send/read TS (100 kHz) as 050177 Send/read TS (2.5 kHz) as selecta-
selectable tuning step for FM ble tuning step for AM
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050156 Send/read TS (1 MHz) as selecta- 050178 Send/read TS (5 Hz) as selectable
ble tuning step for FM tuning step for AM
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050157 Send/read TS (PROG) as selecta- 050179 Send/read TS (6.25 kHz) as
ble tuning step for FM selectable tuning step for AM
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050158 Send/read TS (1 Hz) as selectable 050180 Send/read TS (9 kHz) as selecta-
tuning step for WFM ble tuning step for AM
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050159 Send/read TS (10 Hz) as selecta- 050181 Send/read TS (10 kHz) as selecta-
ble tuning step for WFM ble tuning step for AM
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050160 Send/read TS (100 Hz) as selecta- 050182 Send/read TS (12.5 kHz) as
ble tuning step for WFM selectable tuning step for AM
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050161 Send/read TS (1 kHz) as selecta- 050183 Send/read TS (20 kHz) as selecta-
ble tuning step for WFM ble tuning step for AM
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050162 Send/read TS (2.5 kHz) as selecta- 050184 Send/read TS (25 kHz) as selecta-
ble tuning step for WFM ble tuning step for AM
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050163 Send/read TS (5 Hz) as selectable 050185 Send/read TS (100 kHz) as
tuning step for WFM selectable tuning step for AM
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050164 Send/read TS (6.25 kHz) as 050186 Send/read TS (1 MHz) as selecta-
selectable tuning step for WFM ble tuning step for AM
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050165 Send/read TS (9 kHz) as selecta- 050187 Send/read TS (PROG) as selecta-
ble tuning step for WFM ble tuning step for AM
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050166 Send/read TS (10 kHz) as selecta- 050188 Send/read TS (1 Hz) as selectable
ble tuning step for WFM tuning step for SSB
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050167 Send/read TS (12.5 kHz) as 050189 Send/read TS (10 Hz) as selecta-
selectable tuning step for WFM ble tuning step for SSB
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050168 Send/read TS (20 kHz) as selecta- 050190 Send/read TS (100 Hz) as selecta-
ble tuning step for WFM ble tuning step for SSB
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)

13-7
13 CONTROL COMMAND

D Command table (continued)


Command Sub command Description Command Sub command Description
1A
050191 Send/read TS (1 kHz) as selecta- 1A
050213 Send/read TS (20 kHz) as selecta-
ble tuning step for SSB ble tuning step for CW
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050192 Send/read TS (2.5 kHz) as selecta- 050214 Send/read TS (25 kHz) as selecta-
ble tuning step for SSB ble tuning step for CW
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050193 Send/read TS (5 Hz) as selectable 050215 Send/read TS (100 kHz) as
tuning step for SSB selectable tuning step for CW
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050194 Send/read TS (6.25 kHz) as 050216 Send/read TS (1 MHz) as selecta-
selectable tuning step for SSB ble tuning step for CW
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050195 Send/read TS (9 kHz) as selecta- 050217 Send/read TS (PROG) as selecta-
ble tuning step for SSB ble tuning step for CW
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050196 Send/read TS (10 kHz) as selecta- 050218 Send/read TS (1 Hz) as selectable
ble tuning step for SSB tuning step for FSK
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050197 Send/read TS (12.5 kHz) as 050219 Send/read TS (10 Hz) as selecta-
selectable tuning step for SSB ble tuning step for FSK
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050198 Send/read TS (20 kHz) as selecta- 050220 Send/read TS (100 Hz) as selecta-
ble tuning step for SSB ble tuning step for FSK
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050199 Send/read TS (25 kHz) as selecta- 050221 Send/read TS (1 kHz) as selecta-
ble tuning step for SSB ble tuning step for FSK
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050200 Send/read TS (100 kHz) as 050222 Send/read TS (2.5 kHz) as selecta-
selectable tuning step for SSB ble tuning step for FSK
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050201 Send/read TS (1 MHz) as selecta- 050223 Send/read TS (5 Hz) as selectable
ble tuning step for SSB tuning step for FSK
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050202 Send/read TS (PROG) as selecta- 050224 Send/read TS (6.25 kHz) as
ble tuning step for SSB selectable tuning step for FSK
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050203 Send/read TS (1 Hz) as selectable 050225 Send/read TS (9 kHz) as selecta-
tuning step for CW ble tuning step for FSK
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050204 Send/read TS (10 Hz) as selecta- 050226 Send/read TS (10 kHz) as selecta-
ble tuning step for CW ble tuning step for FSK
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050205 Send/read TS (100 Hz) as selecta- 050227 Send/read TS (12.5 kHz) as
ble tuning step for CW selectable tuning step for FSK
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050206 Send/read TS (1 kHz) as selecta- 050228 Send/read TS (20 kHz) as selecta-
ble tuning step for CW ble tuning step for FSK
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050207 Send/read TS (2.5 kHz) as selecta- 050229 Send/read TS (25 kHz) as selecta-
ble tuning step for CW ble tuning step for FSK
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050208 Send/read TS (5 Hz) as selectable 050230 Send/read TS (100 kHz) as
tuning step for CW selectable tuning step for FSK
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050209 Send/read TS (6.25 kHz) as 050231 Send/read TS (1 MHz) as selecta-
selectable tuning step for CW ble tuning step for FSK
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050210 Send/read TS (9 kHz) as selecta- 050232 Send/read TS (PROG) as selecta-
ble tuning step for CW ble tuning step for FSK
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050211 Send/read TS (10 kHz) as selecta- 050233 Send/read TS (1 Hz) as selectable
ble tuning step for CW tuning step for P25
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)
050212 Send/read TS (12.5 kHz) as 050234 Send/read TS (10 Hz) as selecta-
selectable tuning step for CW ble tuning step for P25
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (0=OFF, 1=ON)

13-8
CONTROL COMMAND 13

D Command table (continued)


Command Sub command Description Command Sub command Description
1A
050235 Send/read TS (100 Hz) as selecta- 1B 01 Set/read TSQL tone frequency.
ble tuning step for P25 (see p. 13-10 for details)
(0=OFF, 1=ON) 02 Set/read DTCS squelch code
050236 Send/read TS (1 kHz) as selecta- (see p. 13-10 for details)
ble tuning step for P25 03 Set/read NAC squelch code
(0=OFF, 1=ON) (see p. 13-11 for details)
050237 Send/read TS (2.5 kHz) as selecta-
04 Set/read TGID for selective
ble tuning step for P25
squelch (see p. 13-11 for details)
(0=OFF, 1=ON)
05 Set/read UNIT ID for selective
050238 Send/read TS (5 Hz) as selectable
squelch (see p. 13-11 for details)
tuning step for P25
(0=OFF, 1=ON) 1D 00 Send/read remote function set
050239 Send/read TS (6.25 kHz) as (0=OFF, 1=REMOTE1 (locks VRs
selectable tuning step for P25 only), 2=REMOTE2 (locks VRs.
(0=OFF, 1=ON) Keys,and dials)
050240 Send/read TS (9 kHz) as selecta-
ble tuning step for P25
(0=OFF, 1=ON)
050241 Send/read TS (10 kHz) as selecta-
ble tuning step for P25
(0=OFF, 1=ON)
050242 Send/read TS (12.5 kHz) as
selectable tuning step for P25
(0=OFF, 1=ON)
050243 Send/read TS (20 kHz) as selecta-
ble tuning step for P25
(0=OFF, 1=ON)
050244 Send/read TS (25 kHz) as selecta-
ble tuning step for P25
(0=OFF, 1=ON)
050245 Send/read TS (100 kHz) as
selectable tuning step for P25
(0=OFF, 1=ON)
050246 Send/read TS (1 MHz) as selecta-
ble tuning step for P25
(0=OFF, 1=ON)
050247 Send/read TS (PROG) as selecta-
ble tuning step for P25
(0=OFF, 1=ON)
050248 Send/read CW pitch set
(0=300 Hz to 120=900 Hz in 5 Hz
steps)
050249 Send/read FSK RX frequency
(0=Mark(Space), 1=Mark/Space
Center)
050250 Send/read FSK tone frequency
(0=1275 Hz, 1=1500 Hz,
2=1615 Hz, 3=2125 Hz)
050251 Send/read FSK shift width
(0=170 Hz, 1=200 Hz, 2=425 Hz,
3=800 Hz,4=850 Hz )
08 Send/read DSP filter shape
(0= sharp, 1= soft)
09 Send/read roofing filter set (FM/
AM/SSB/CW/FSK; 0=3 kHz,
1=6 kHz, 2=15 kHz, 3=50 kHz,
WFM; 4=240 kHz, P25; 2=15
kHz)
0A Send/read manual notch1 width
(0=Wide, 1=Mid., 2=Nar.)
0B Send/read manual notch2 width
(0=Wide, 1=Mid., 2=Nar.)

13-9
13 CONTROL COMMAND

D To send/read memory contents D Offset frequency setting


When sending or reading memory contents, addi- The following data sequence is used when sending or
tional codes must be added to appoint the memory reading the offset frequency setting.
channel as follows. q w e r
➥ Additional code: 0000–1219
X 0 X X X X 0 X
• Memory channel code
Code Bank number Memory Cnannel

100 Hz digit: 0 (fixed)


0000–0999 Bank-0–Bank-9 0–999

1 GHz digit: 0 (fixed)

100 MHz digit: 0–4


100 kHz digit: 0–9
1000–1099 Bank-A (Auto) A00–A99

10 MHz digit: 0–9


10 kHz digit: 0–9

1 MHz digit: 0–4


1 kHz digit: 0–9
1100–1199 Bank-S (Skip) S00–S99
1200–1219 Bank-P (Scan edge) P0A–P9B

• Memory bank code


Code Bank number
00–09 Bank-0–Bank-9
10 Bank-A (Auto)
11 Bank-S (Slip) D Tone squelch frequency setting
12 Bank-P (Scan edge) The following data sequence is used when sending or
reading the tone frequency setting.
q* w e

D Codes for memory name, bank name, 0 0 X X X X


opening message and clock 2 name
contents 100Hz digit: 0–2

0.1 Hz digit: 0–9


10 Hz digit: 0–9

1 Hz digit: 0–9
Fixed digit: 0*

Fixed digit: 0*

To send or read the desired memory name settings,


the character codes as follows are used.
• Character’s code
Character ASCII code Description
0–9 30–39 Numerals
*Not necessary when setting a frequency.
A–Z 41–5A Alphabetical characters
a–z 61–7A Alphabetical characters
space 20 Word space
D DTCS squelch code setting
The following data sequence is used when sending or
• Character’s code— Symbols reading the DTCS code setting.
Character ASCII code Character ASCII code q† w e
! 21 # 23 0 X 0 X X X
$ 24 % 25
& 26 ¥ 5C
DTCS Polarity†, ‡: 0. 1

? 3F ” 22
Fixed digit: 0†

100 digit: 0–7

’ 27 ` 60
Fixed digit: 0

10 digit: 0–7

1 digit: 0–7

^ 5E + 2B
– 2D ✱ 2A
/ 2F . 2E
, 2C : 3A

; 3B = 3D Not necessary when normal is set.

0=Normal, 1=Reverse
< 3C > 3E
( 28 ) 29
[ 5B ] 5D
{ 7B } 7D
| 7C _ 5F
– 7E @ 40

13-10
CONTROL COMMAND 13

D NAC squelch code setting D Color setting


The following data sequence is used when sending or The following data sequence is used when sending or
reading the NAC code setting. reading the color setting.
q w e q w e r t y
0 X 0 X 0 X 0 X X X 0 X X X 0 X X X

1000

1000

1000
2nd digit: 0–F

3rd digit: 0–F

100

100

100
1st digit: 0–F
Fixed digit: 0

Fixed digit: 0

Fixed digit: 0

10

10

10
1

1
R (Red) G (Green) B (Blue)

Using 0000–0255 for each color element.

Selectable NAC: 0 0 0 – F F F

D Selective squelch code settings


• TGID setting
The following data sequence is used when sending or
reading the TGID code setting.
q w e r
0 X 0 X 0 X 0 X
2nd digit: 0–F
1st digit: 0–F

3rd digit: 0–F

4th digit: 0–F


Fixed digit: 0

Fixed digit: 0

Fixed digit: 0

Fixed digit: 0

Selectable TGID: 0 0 0 0 – F F F F

• UNIT ID setting
The following data sequence is used when sending or
reading the UNIT ID code setting.
q w e r t y
0 X 0 X 0 X 0 X 0 X 0 X
2nd digit: 0–F
1st digit: 0–F

3rd digit: 0–F

4th digit: 0–F

5th digit: 0–F

6th digit: 0–F


Fixed digit: 0

Fixed digit: 0

Fixed digit: 0

Fixed digit: 0

Fixed digit: 0

Fixed digit: 0

Selectable UNIT ID: 0 0 0 0 0 1 – 9 8 9 6 7 F

13-11
SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS Section 14
■ Specifications ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 14-2
D General ��������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 14-2
D Receiver ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 14-3
■ Options ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 14-4

14-1
14 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS

■ Specifications
D General
• Frequency coverage (unit: MHz) :
USA 0.005000–821.999999, 851.000000–866.999999
896.000000–3335.000000
France 0.0050000–29.999999, 50.200000–51.200000,
87.500000–108.000000, 144.000000–146.000000,
430.000000–440.000000, 1240.000000–1300.000000
Europe, U.K., USA-01, EXP, Australia 0.005000–3335.000000
• Operating mode : USB, LSB, CW, FSK, AM, FM, WFM, P25 (with UT-122)
• Number of memory channels : 1220 (1000 regular channels, 100 auto memory write
channels, 100 skip channels, 20 scan edge channels)
• Antenna connector : Type-N×2 (antenna impedance: 50 Ω),
SO-239×1 (antenna impedance: 50 Ω),
Phono (RCA)×1 (antenna impedance: 500 Ω)
• Operating temperature range : 0˚C to +50˚C; +32˚F to +122˚F
• Frequency stability : Less than ±0.05 ppm (approx. 5 min. after from turn the
main power, [I/O], ON, 0–50˚C; 32–122˚F)
• Frequency resolution : 1 Hz
• Power supply requirement : 100 V, 120 V, 230 V, 240 V AC
• Power consumption :
Receive Stand-by Less than 100 VA
Max. audio Less than 100 VA
• Dimensions (projections not included) : 424×149×340 mm; 1611⁄16×57⁄8×133⁄8 in
• Weight : Approx. 20 kg; 44 lb
• ACC connector : 8-pin DIN connector
• DATA IN connector : 8-pin DIN connector
• Display* : 7-inch (diagonal) TFT color LCD (800×480)
• EXT-DISPLAY connector : D-sub 15S
• RS-232C connector : D-sub 9-pin
• VIDEO IN connector : Phono (RCA)
• VIDEO OUT connector : Phono (RCA)
• SPEECH OUT connector : Phono (RCA)
• LINE OUT connector : Phono (RCA)
• USB connector : USB (Universal Serial Bus)1.1/2.0
• CI-V connector : 2-conductor 3.5 (d) mm (1⁄8″)
• ANT-SEL connector : 3-conductor 3.5 (d) mm (1⁄8″)
• DET OUT connector : 3-conductor 3.5 (d) mm (1⁄8″)
• EXT-SP connectors : 2-conductor 3.5 (d) mm (1⁄8″)/8 Ω
• REC REMOTE connector : 3-conductor 3.5 (d) mm (1⁄8″)×2
(Front and rear panels)
• REC OUT connector : 3-conductor 3.5 (d) mm (1⁄8″)
• PHONES connector : 3-conductor 3.5 (d) mm (1⁄8″)

All stated specifications are typical and subject to change without notice or obligation.

14-2
SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS 14

D Receiver
• Sensitivity :
SSB, CW, FSK (BW (SSB, FSK)=2.4 kHz, (CW)=500 Hz, 10 dB S/N)
0.100–1.799 MHz 0.5 µV (pre-amp 1 ON)
1.800–29.999 MHz 0.2 µV (pre-amp 1 ON)
30.000–2999.999 MHz 0.32 µV (pre-amp ON)
3000.000–3335.000 MHz 1 µV (pre-amp ON)
AM (BW=6 kHz, 10 dB S/N)
0.100–1.799 MHz 6.3 µV (pre-amp 1 ON)
1.800–29.999 MHz 2.5 µV (pre-amp 1 ON)
30.000–2999.999 MHz 3.5 µV (pre-amp ON)
3000.000–3335.000 MHz 11 µV (pre-amp ON)
FM (BW=15 kHz, 12 dB SINAD)
28.000–29.990 MHz 0.5 µV (pre-amp 1 ON)
30.000–2999.999 MHz 0.5 µV (pre-amp ON)
3000.000–3335.000 MHz 1.6 µV (pre-amp ON)
FM50k (BW=50 kHz, 12 dB SINAD)
28.000–29.990 MHz 0.71 µV (pre-amp 1 ON)
30.000–2999.999 MHz 0.71 µV (pre-amp ON)
3000.000–3335.000 MHz 2.2 µV (pre-amp ON)
WFM (BW=180 kHz, 12 dB SINAD)
30.000–2999.999 MHz 1.4 µV (pre-amp ON)
3000.000–3335.000 MHz 4.5 µV (pre-amp ON)
• Internal modulation distortion (typical) : Dynamic range 109 dB
(at 14.100 MHz, 100 kHz separation, Pre-amp 1 OFF)
• Selectivity :
SSB, FSK (BW=2.4 kHz) More than 2.4 kHz/–3 dB
Less than 3.6 kHz/–60 dB
CW (BW=500 Hz) More than 500 Hz/–3 dB
Less than 700 Hz/–60 dB
AM (BW=6 kHz) More than 6.0 kHz/–3 dB
Less than 15.0 kHz/–60 dB
FM (BW=15 kHz) More than 12.0 kHz/–3 dB
Less than 25.0 kHz/–60 dB
WFM More than 180.0 kHz/–6 dB
• Spurious and image rejection response ratio :
0.1000–30.000 MHz More than 70 dB
30.000–2500.000 MHz More than 50 dB
2500.000–3000.000 MHz More than 40 dB
• Audio output power : More than 2.6 W at 10% distortion with an 8 Ω load

*The LCD display may have cosmetic imperfections that appear as small or dark spots. This is not a malfunc-
tion or defect, but a normal characteristic of LCD displays.
Spurious signals may be received near the following frequencies. These are made in the internal circuit and
does not indicate a receiver malfunction.
• 114.110 kHz, • 229.280 kHz, • 8.636 MHz, • 10.749 MHz, • 66.671 MHz, • 119.259 MHz,
• 161.732 MHz, • 200.865 MHz, • 440.865 MHz, • 1226.749 MHz, • 1269.398 MHz, • 1317.398 MHz,
• 1410.649 MHz, • 1439.999 MHz, • 1599.999 MHz, • 1645.449 MHz, • 1674.799 MHz, • 1810.773 MHz,
• 1856.098 MHz, • 1875.665 MHz, • 2005.448 MHz, • 2154.798 MHz, • 2336.099 MHz, • 2394.798 MHz,
• 2512.199 MHz, • 2799.999 MHz, • 2842.848 MHz, • 2933.500 MHz, • 2999.999 MHz, • 3199.999 MHz,
• 3232.198 MHz, • 3261.548 MHz
Spurious waveforms may be displayed on the spectrum scope screen regardless of the receiver’s condition.
They are made in the scope circuit. This does not indicate a receiver malfunction.

14-3
14 SPECIFICATIONS AND OPTIONS

■ Options
• CT-17 ci-v level converter
For remote receivers control using a PC. You can
change frequencies, operating mode, memory
channels, etc. (software is not included)

• SP-20 external speaker


4 audio filters; headphone jack; can connect to 2
receivers.
• Input impedance : 8 Ω
• Max. input power : 5 W

• UT-122 digital unit


Provides P25 (digital) mode operation.

Approved Icom optional equipment is designed


for optimal performance when used with an Icom
receiver.
Icom is not responsible for the destruction or
damage to an Icom receiver in the event the
Icom receiver is used with equipment that is not
manufactured or approved by Icom.

14-4
UPDATING THE FIRMWARE Section 15
■ General ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 15-2
■ Caution ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 15-2
■ Preparation ������������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 15-3
D Firmware and firm utility ������������������������������������������������������������� 15-3
D File downloading ����������������������������������������������������������������������� 15-3
■ Firmware update— USB-Memory �������������������������������������������������� 15-4
■ Firmware update— PC ������������������������������������������������������������������� 15-6
D Connections �������������������������������������������������������������������������������� 15-6
D IP address setting ����������������������������������������������������������������������� 15-7
D Updating from the PC ����������������������������������������������������������������� 15-8

15-1
15 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

■ General
The IC-R9500’s firmware can be updated if desired.
By updating the firmware, new function(s) can be
added and performance parameters improved.

At least one available USB (2.0 or 1.1) port is 2 methods of firmware update are available; one uses
required to copy the downloaded firmware file. the USB-Memory, and the other uses a PC.
An Ethernet card/board (10 BASE-T/100 BASE TX You can choose either method according to your PC
compatible) is required when updating the firmware capabilities.
from the PC. • When only one PC that is connected to the INTER-
The USB hub and Ethernet card/board are not sup- NET is available
plied by Icom. ➥ Refer to ■ Preparation (p. 15-3) and ■ Firmware
Ask your PC dealer about a USB hub and an update—USB-Memory (p. 15-4)
Ethernet card/board for details. • When two or more PCs that are connected to the
INTERNET are available and they are connected to a
LAN (Local Area Network)
➥ R efer to ■  Preparation (p. 15-3) and either
■ Firmware update— PC (p. 15-6) or ■ Firmware
update—USB-Memory (p. 15-4)

Ask your dealer or distributor about how to update the


firmware if you have no PC.

D Firmware confirmation
The firmware version of the IC-R9500 can be con-
firmed during turning power ON.
• The firmware version appears at the right bottom corner.

iR9500


1.10 Firmware
version

■ Caution
CAUTION: NEVER turn the receiver power OFF while
updating the firmware.
You can turn the receiver power OFF only when the
receiver display shows that rebooting is required.
If you turn the receiver power OFF, or if a power failure
occurs during updating, the receiver firmware will be
corrupted and you will have to send the receiver back
to the nearest Icom distributor for repair. This type of
repair is out of warranty even if the warranty period is
still valid.

Recommendation!
Backing up the settings and/or memory contents to the
CF card or USB-Memory before starting the firmware
update is recommended.
Settings and/or memory contents will be lost or re-
turned to default settings when the firmware update
is performed.

15-2
UPDATING THE FIRMWARE 15

■ Preparation
D Firmware and firm utility
The latest firmware and the firm utility can be down-
loaded from the Icom home page via the Internet. Ac-
cess the following URL to download the firm utility
and the latest firmware.
http://www.icom.co.jp/world/index.html

For updating from the USB-Memory


When updating the firmware from the USB-Memory,
copy the downloaded firmware data (e.g. 9500xxxx.dat)
to the USB-Memory (in “IC-R9500” folder) using an
available USB port (USB hub may be required; purchased
separately from your PC dealer).

D File downloading
q Access the following URL.
http://www.icom.co.jp/world/index.html
w Click [Support] button.
e Click “Firmware Updates/Software Downloads” link
then click the firmware file link.
r C lick the desired firmware file link in IC-R9500
group.

t Read “Regarding this Download Service” carefully,


then click [Agree].

Read carefully

Click

y Click [Save] in the displayed File Download dialog.

Click

u Select the desired location to which you want to


save the firmware, then click [Save] in the displayed
File Download dialog.
Select the saving
• File download starts.
location
i After download is completed, extract the file.
• The firmware and the firm utility are compressed in “zip”
format, respectively.
• When updating the receiver using with the USB-Mem-
ory, copy the extracted firmware (e.g. 9500xxxx.dat) to
the USB-Memory IC-R9500 folder.
9500xxxx.dat
Click • The USB-Memory must have been formatted by the IC-
R9500 (p. 11-23).

15-3
15 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

■ Firmware update—USB-Memory
When updating the firmware with the CF card or USB-
Memory, no IP address or subnet mask settings are
necessary.

[F-7•SET]/[F-7•CF/USB] q Copy the downloaded firmware data into the USB-


[F-3•FIRM UP]/[F-3•Z] [F-6•OK] /[F-7•CANCEL] Memory (“IC-R9500” folder).
• The USB-Memory must have been formatted by the IC-
R9500.
w Insert the USB-Memory into the USB connector.
e Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multifunc-
tion screen, if necessary.
r Push [F-7•SET] to select set mode menu screen.
t Push [F-7•CF/USB] to select CF/USB-Memory set
menu.
[F-1•Y]/[F-1•DIR/FILE] [F-4•FIRM UP] [EXIT/SET]
[F-2•Z]/[F-2•Y]

y Push and hold [F-3•FIRM UP] for 1 sec.

u Read the displayed precautions carefully.


• Push [F-1•Y] or [F-2•Z] to scroll the text.
• Push [F-7•CANCEL] to cancel firmware updating.

i After you read and understand all of the precau-


tions, push [F-6•OK].
• [F-6•OK] appears only following the precautions.
• Push [F-7•CANCEL] to cancel the firmware updating.

o Push [F-2•Y] or [F-3•Z] to select the firmware file,


then push [F-4•FIRM UP].
• Push and hold [F-1•DIR/FILE] for 1 sec. to select the
USB-Memory, if CF card is selected.

!0 Read the displayed precautions carefully.


!1 If you agree, push [F-6•OK] for 1 sec. to start the
firmware update.
• Push [F-7•CANCEL] to cancel firmware updating.

!2 While loading the firmware from the USB-memory,


the dialog at left is displayed.

15-4
UPDATING THE FIRMWARE 15

!3 After firmware loading is completed, the receiver


starts the update automatically and the dialog at left
is displayed.

R
 WARNING! NEVER turn the IC-R9500 power
OFF at this stage.
The receiver firmware will be damaged.

!4 When the dialog disappears, the precaution as at


left is displayed.
!5 R ead the precaution carefully, and then push
[F-6•OK].
• Return to CF/USB-Memory set menu.

!6 Push [POWER] to turn the IC-R9500 power OFF,


then ON again.

RX-DSP UPDATING...
!7 Depending on the status of the update process, ei-
Please wait for 20sec. Please wait for 45sec.
WARNING! NEVER turn power OFF. WARNING! NEVER turn power OFF.
ther of dialogs at left will appears in sequence.

R
 WARNING! NEVER turn the IC-R9500 power
OFF at this stage.
The receiver firmware will be corrupted.

!8 After the dialog disappears, the firmware update


is completed and the normal operation screen ap-
pears.

15-5
15 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

■ Firmware update— PC
D Connections Connect the IC-R9500 and the PC through a LAN
(Local Area Network) as follows.

IC-R9500 (192.168.100.13) PC1 PC2


(192.168.100.11) (192.168.100.12)

Hub/Router*
Ethernet cable* to WAN
(Patch cable) = × × × × /Internet network

to crossover port

*Purchased separately
• IP address setting example
PC1 PC2 IC-R9500
IP address 192.168.100.11 192.168.100.12 192.168.100.13
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0

15-6
UPDATING THE FIRMWARE 15

D IP address setting When updating the firmware from the USB-Memory,
setting the IP address is not necessary.

IMPORTANT! A fixed (static) IP address is used for


the IC-R9500.
When you connect the IC-R9500 to a LAN, ask
the network manager about a usable/assignable IP
address and the subnet mask in advance.
NEVER use an IP address that has already been
allocated to another device in the network. If the IP
address is duplicated, the network will crash.
[F-5•OTHERS] [F-7•SET] q Push [EXIT/SET] several times to close a multifunc-
tion screen, if necessary.
w Push [F-7•SET] to select set mode menu screen.
e Push [F-5•OTHERS] to select the others set mode.

[F-1•Y] [F-2•Z] [F-3•� �] [EXIT/SET]

r Push [F-1•Y]/[F-2•Z] several times to select “IP Ad-


dress.”
t Push [F-3•t u] to select the desired segment then
rotate main dial to set the desired or specified IP
address.
• “192.168.0.1” is the default setting.
y Push [F-2•Z] to select “Subnet Mask” item.
u Rotate main dial to set the desired or specified sub-
net mask.
• “255.255.255.0” is the default setting.
i Push [POWER] to turn the receiver power OFF,
then ON to accept the new IP address and subnet
mask settings.

15-7
15 UPDATING THE FIRMWARE

D Updating from the PC


q Start up the IC-R9500 Firm Utility.
iR9500 • The window as at left appears.
COMMUNICATIONS RECEIVER w Read the caution in the window carefully.
e Click [Yes] if you agree and to continue the firmware
updating.

Firm Utility
===CAUTION===
Updating the firmware is very risky. If you make a mistake, the IC-R9500 may
not operate properly, and repair at Icom Inc.(Japan) may be the only way to
fix it.
You undertake the updating of the firmware at you own risk and responsibility,
Please refer to the firmware download homepage and/or the instruction manual
for the correct procedures in updating the firmware.
Also all preciously set conditions, the memory contents, etc will be lost when
making a firmware update.
Making a backup file of programmed contents and settings onto the CF/USB-
Memory before updating is recommended.
Do you agree to all of the above?
Click to
continue

IC-R9500 Firm Utility r Select the firmware file with the “dat” extension (e.g.:
9500xxxx.dat).
iR9500
COMMUNICATIONS RECEIVER
• Click […], then select the file, as well as the location.
t Type the IC-R9500’s IP address into “IC-R9500 IP
Click […] to select the firmware file.
Version 1.00 Address” text box.
(C) 2006 Icom Inc. y Click [Start].
Firmware File Name

IC-R9500 IP Address

Type the IC-R9500’s IP address here.


Turn the IC-R9500 power ON.
When the normal operational screen appears, set the firmware file name
and IP address, then click [Start] button.

u The window at left appears.


Updating the main CPU firmware first.
Read the precaution in the window carefully.
It will take approx. 1 minute. i Click [Yes] if you want to start the firmware update.
DO NOT turn the IC-R9500 power OFF until "Completed" dialog is displayed.

Depending on the updated contents, the sub CPU and/or DSP firmware will
automatically be updated when rebooting the IC-R9500 and this will take
approx. 2 minutes. DO NOT turn the IC-R9500 power OFF until the normal
operational screen appears, in such case.

Do you wish to start the firmware update?

Click to start the


firmware update

15-8
UPDATING THE FIRMWARE 15

IC-R9500 Firm Utility o The screen at left is displayed.


• The following dialog appears in the IC-R9500 display.
iR9500
COMMUNICATIONS RECEIVER

Version 1.00
(C) 2006 Icom Inc.

Firmware File Name

IC-R9500 IP Address R
 WARNING! NEVER turn the IC-R9500 power
OFF at this stage.
The receiver firmware will be corrupted.

Connecting to the IC-R9500.


Connected to the IC-R9500.
Transfer in progress...
Transfer successful.
Start update.
Please wait a while.

!0 Click [OK] to finish the firmware update.


• The “FIRMWARE UPDATING” dialog as above disap-
Firmware up dating for the main CPU is completed.
pears.
Turn the IC-R9500 power OFF, then ON again with [POWER] switch.
After turning the power ON, the IC-R9500 will work with the updated firmware. !1 Push [POWER] to turn the IC-R9500 power OFF,
The sub CPU and/or DSP firmware update will start automatically depending on the updated contents,
and this will take approx. 2 minutes.
then ON again.
DO NOT turn the IC-R9500 power OFF until the normal operational screen appears.

Click [OK] to finish the firmware update.

RX-DSP UPDATING... !2 Depending on the status of the update process, ei-


Please wait for 20sec.
WARNING! NEVER turn power OFF. WARNING!
Please wait for 45sec.
NEVER turn power OFF.
ther of dialogs at left will appear in sequence.

R
 WARNING! NEVER turn the IC-R9500 power
OFF at this stage.
The receiver firmware will be corrupted.

!3 After the dialog disappears, the firmware update


is completed and the normal operation screen ap-
pears.

15-9
ABOUT CE

DECLARATION
OF CONFORMITY

We Icom Inc. Japan


1-1-32, Kamiminami, Hirano-ku
Osaka 547-0003, Japan
Declare on our sole responsibility that this equipment complies with the
essential requirements of the Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Bad Soden 27th May 2011
Equipment Directive, 1999/5/EC, and that any applicable Essential Test Place and date of issue
Suite measurements have been performed.
Kind of equipment: COMMUNICATIONS RECEIVER Icom (Europe) GmbH
Communication Equipment
Auf der Krautweide 24,
Type-designation: iC- r9500 65812 Bad Soden am Taunus,
Germany
Authorized representative name
Version (where applicable):
Y. Furukawa
This compliance is based on conformity with the following harmonised
General Manager
standards, specifications or documents:
i) EN 301 489-1 V1.8.1 (2008-04)
ii) EN 301 489-15 V1.2.1 (2002-08)
iii) EN 301 783-2 V1.2.1 (2010-07)
iv) EN 60950-1:2006/A1:2010
v) Signature
vi)

MAY.2011

Versions of the IC-R9500 which display the • List of Country codes (ISO 3166-1)
“CE” symbol on the serial number label, Country Codes Country Codes
comply with the essential requirements of 1 Austria AT 18 Liechtenstein LI
the European Radio and Telecommunica- 2 Belgium BE 19 Lithuania LT
tion Terminal Directive 1999/5/EC. 3 Bulgaria BG 20 Luxembourg LU
4 Croatia HR 21 Malta MT
5 Czech Republic CZ 22 Netherlands NL
6 Cyprus CY 23 Norway NO
7 Denmark DK 24 Poland PL
8 Estonia EE 25 Portugal PT
9 Finland FI 26 Romania RO
10 France FR 27 Slovakia SK
11 Germany DE 28 Slovenia SI
12 Greece GR 29 Spain ES
13 Hungary HU 30 Sweden SE
14 Iceland IS 31 Switzerland CH
15 Ireland IE 32 Turkey TR
16 Italy IT 33 United Kingdom GB
17 Latvia LV
Please record the serial number of your IC-R9500 receiver below for future servicing
reference:

Serial Number :

Date of purchase :

Place where purchased :


IC-R9500 <Intended Country of Use>
#03 (France)
■ AT ■ BE ■ CY ■ CZ ■ DK ■ EE
■ FI ■ FR ■ DE ■ GR ■ HU ■ IE
■ IT ■ LV ■ LT ■ LU ■ MT ■ NL
■ PL ■ PT ■ SK ■ SI ■ ES ■ SE
■ GB ■ IS ■ LI ■ NO ■ CH ■ BG
■ RO ■ TR ■ HR

IC-R9500 <Intended Country of Use>


#04 (Europe)
■ AT ■ BE ■ CY ■ CZ ■ DK ■ EE
■ FI ■ FR ■ DE ■ GR ■ HU ■ IE
■ IT ■ LV ■ LT ■ LU ■ MT ■ NL
■ PL ■ PT ■ SK ■ SI ■ ES ■ SE
■ GB ■ IS ■ LI ■ NO ■ CH ■ BG
■ RO ■ TR ■ HR

IC-R9500 <Intended Country of Use>


#05 (United
■ AT ■ BE ■ CY ■ CZ ■ DK ■ EE
Kingdom)
■ FI ■ FR ■ DE ■ GR ■ HU ■ IE
■ IT ■ LV ■ LT ■ LU ■ MT ■ NL
■ PL ■ PT ■ SK ■ SI ■ ES ■ SE
■ GB ■ IS ■ LI ■ NO ■ CH ■ BG
■ RO ■ TR ■ HR

1-1-32 Kamiminami, Hirano-ku, Osaka 547-0003, Japan

You might also like